GE Network Card EPM5200P User Manual

POWER LEADER TM  
PMCS 6.11a  
Interface Toolkit  
Installation Guide  
GEH-6513  
GE Power Management Control System 6.11a  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Back to Main Menu i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................................................. 1  
WELCOME......................................................................................................................................................................... 1  
HOW SHOULD I USE THIS MANUAL? .................................................................................................................................. 2  
CONVENTIONS .................................................................................................................................................................. 3  
ABOUT THE INTERFACE TOOLKIT...................................................................................................................................... 3  
INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................................................................. 3  
USING AND CONFIGURING PMCS WIZARDS ......................................................................................................... 5  
ABOUT THE WIZARDS ....................................................................................................................................................... 5  
SMALL FACEPLATE WIZARDS ........................................................................................................................................... 6  
Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................... 6  
Configuration............................................................................................................................................................... 6  
LARGE FACEPLATE WIZARDS............................................................................................................................................ 8  
Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................... 8  
Configuration............................................................................................................................................................... 9  
Special Considerations ................................................................................................................................................ 9  
TABULAR DATA SCREEN WIZARDS................................................................................................................................. 11  
Usage ......................................................................................................................................................................... 11  
Configuration............................................................................................................................................................. 11  
ONE-LINE WIZARDS........................................................................................................................................................ 16  
Usage ......................................................................................................................................................................... 16  
Configuration............................................................................................................................................................. 17  
Circuit Breaker One-Line Wizards............................................................................................................................. 21  
ELEVATION WIZARDS ..................................................................................................................................................... 22  
Usage ......................................................................................................................................................................... 22  
Configuration............................................................................................................................................................. 22  
FLOOR PLAN WIZARDS ................................................................................................................................................... 23  
Usage ......................................................................................................................................................................... 23  
Configuration............................................................................................................................................................. 23  
TOOLBAR WIZARD.......................................................................................................................................................... 24  
Usage ......................................................................................................................................................................... 24  
Configuration............................................................................................................................................................. 24  
ANNUNCIATOR PANEL WIZARD ...................................................................................................................................... 25  
Usage ......................................................................................................................................................................... 25  
Configuration............................................................................................................................................................. 29  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Back to Main Menu iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Tips for the Annunciator Panel Wizard .......................................................................................... 34  
CUSTOM TABLE WIZARD ................................................................................................................................................ 35  
Usage ......................................................................................................................................................................... 35  
Configuration............................................................................................................................................................. 35  
SYSTEM STATISTICS WIZARD .......................................................................................................................................... 40  
Usage ......................................................................................................................................................................... 40  
Configuration............................................................................................................................................................. 40  
LOCKOUT/TAGOUT WIZARD ........................................................................................................................................... 42  
Usage ......................................................................................................................................................................... 42  
Supported Devices...................................................................................................................................................... 42  
Configuration............................................................................................................................................................. 43  
Example of Lockout/Tagout Wizard........................................................................................................................... 44  
SPECIAL SCRIPTING CONSIDERATIONS FOR THE EPM 7700............................................................................................. 48  
Installing the Application Script ................................................................................................................................ 49  
EPM 7700 Tabular Data Screen Scripting ................................................................................................................ 54  
CREATING FLOOR PLANS, ELEVATION VIEWS, AND ONE-LINE DIAGRAMS ........................................... 55  
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................................... 55  
ELEVATION VIEWS .......................................................................................................................................................... 55  
FLOOR PLANS.................................................................................................................................................................. 57  
ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................................. 58  
CREATING A BASIC INTERFACE ........................................................................................................................................ 61  
FEATURES OF GE LARGE FACEPLATE WIZARDS.............................................................................................. 67  
ABOUT THE LARGE FACEPLATE WIZARDS ...................................................................................................................... 67  
POWER LEADER EPM................................................................................................................................................ 68  
SPECTRA MICROVERSATRIP TRIP UNIT .......................................................................................................................... 71  
ENHANCED MICROVERSATRIP-C TRIP UNIT .................................................................................................................. 72  
ENHANCED MICROVERSATRIP-D TRIP UNIT .................................................................................................................. 74  
POWER LEADER METER............................................................................................................................................. 76  
SPECTRA ECM................................................................................................................................................................ 78  
EPM 3710 METER.......................................................................................................................................................... 80  
EPM 3720 METER.......................................................................................................................................................... 82  
EPM 7700 METER.......................................................................................................................................................... 84  
269 PLUS MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY ....................................................................................................................... 87  
565 FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY................................................................................................................................ 92  
FEATURES OF TABULAR DATA SCREEN WIZARDS........................................................................................... 99  
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................................... 99  
FEATURES OF TABULAR DATA SCREENS......................................................................................................................... 99  
POWER LEADER EPM ................................................................................................................................................... 101  
SPECTRA MICROVERSATRIP ......................................................................................................................................... 102  
ENHANCED MICROVERSATRIP-C TRIP UNIT ................................................................................................................ 103  
ENHANCED MICROVERSATRIP-D TRIP UNIT ................................................................................................................ 104  
POWER LEADER METER........................................................................................................................................... 105  
SPECTRA ECM.............................................................................................................................................................. 106  
MDP DIGITAL OVERCURRENT RELAY .......................................................................................................................... 107  
Monitoring Tab ........................................................................................................................................................ 107  
Command Tab.......................................................................................................................................................... 108  
Setup Tab ................................................................................................................................................................. 109  
PQM (POWER QUALITY METER) .................................................................................................................................. 110  
Metering Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 111  
Status Tab................................................................................................................................................................. 112  
Demand Tab............................................................................................................................................................. 113  
IV Range Tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 114  
iv Contents  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P Range Tab............................................................................................................................................................. 115  
Analysis Tab............................................................................................................................................................. 116  
IO Tab...................................................................................................................................................................... 117  
Setpoints Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 118  
MOTOR MANAGER II (MMII)....................................................................................................................................... 119  
EPM 3710 METER........................................................................................................................................................ 120  
EPM 3720 METER........................................................................................................................................................ 121  
EPM 7300 METER........................................................................................................................................................ 122  
Metering Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 123  
Min/Max Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 124  
Setup Tab ................................................................................................................................................................. 125  
EPM 7330 METER........................................................................................................................................................ 126  
Metering Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 127  
Min/Max................................................................................................................................................................... 128  
Setup Tab ................................................................................................................................................................. 129  
EPM 7500/7600 METER............................................................................................................................................... 130  
Metering Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 130  
Min/Max Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 132  
Power Quality Tab................................................................................................................................................... 133  
Demand Tab............................................................................................................................................................. 134  
Inputs Tab ................................................................................................................................................................ 135  
Setup 1 Tab .............................................................................................................................................................. 136  
Setup 2 Tab .............................................................................................................................................................. 138  
EPM 7700 METER........................................................................................................................................................ 140  
Metering Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 140  
Min/Max Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 142  
Power Quality Tab................................................................................................................................................... 143  
Demand Tab............................................................................................................................................................. 144  
Inputs Tab ................................................................................................................................................................ 145  
Setup 1 Tab .............................................................................................................................................................. 146  
Setup 2 Tab .............................................................................................................................................................. 148  
UNIVERSAL RELAY ....................................................................................................................................................... 150  
Metering Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 151  
Power Quality Tab................................................................................................................................................... 152  
Protection Control Tab............................................................................................................................................ 153  
Power System Configuration Tab ............................................................................................................................ 154  
Transformer Tab ...................................................................................................................................................... 156  
Elements Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 157  
Digital Counter Tab................................................................................................................................................. 158  
Virtual Inputs Tab.................................................................................................................................................... 159  
Virtual Outputs Tab ................................................................................................................................................. 160  
Contact Inputs Tab................................................................................................................................................... 161  
Contact Output Tab.................................................................................................................................................. 162  
DCMA Tab............................................................................................................................................................... 163  
Source Tabs.............................................................................................................................................................. 164  
Demand Tab............................................................................................................................................................. 165  
Line Tab ................................................................................................................................................................... 166  
Breaker Tab ............................................................................................................................................................. 167  
Contact Output Current States Tab.......................................................................................................................... 168  
Remote Temperature Detection Tab ........................................................................................................................ 169  
Bus Tab .................................................................................................................................................................... 170  
239 MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY.................................................................................................................................. 171  
Metering tab............................................................................................................................................................. 171  
Status Tab ................................................................................................................................................................ 172  
Trip Data.................................................................................................................................................................. 173  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Contents v  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setpoints Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 174  
269 PLUS MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY ..................................................................................................................... 175  
369 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY .............................................................................................................................. 176  
Metering Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 176  
Alarms Tab............................................................................................................................................................... 178  
Demand Tab............................................................................................................................................................. 179  
Local RTD Tab......................................................................................................................................................... 180  
Remote RTD Tab...................................................................................................................................................... 181  
Control Tab.............................................................................................................................................................. 182  
Setup Tab ................................................................................................................................................................. 183  
SR469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY.......................................................................................................................... 184  
Metering Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 184  
Status Tab................................................................................................................................................................. 185  
Alarms Tab............................................................................................................................................................... 186  
Trip Tab.................................................................................................................................................................... 187  
IO Tab ...................................................................................................................................................................... 188  
Maintenance Tab...................................................................................................................................................... 189  
Analog Tab............................................................................................................................................................... 190  
RTD HI Tab.............................................................................................................................................................. 191  
Setpoints Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 191  
SR489 GENERATOR MANAGEMENT RELAY.................................................................................................................. 192  
Metering Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 192  
Pickup Tab ............................................................................................................................................................... 193  
Alarms Tab............................................................................................................................................................... 193  
Trip Data Tab........................................................................................................................................................... 194  
IO Tab ...................................................................................................................................................................... 195  
Maintenance Tab...................................................................................................................................................... 196  
Setpoints Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 197  
565 FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY.............................................................................................................................. 198  
735 FEEDER RELAY ...................................................................................................................................................... 200  
Metering Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 200  
Trip Data Tab........................................................................................................................................................... 201  
Setpoints Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 202  
SR745 TRANSFORMER MANAGEMENT RELAY.............................................................................................................. 203  
Metering Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 203  
Flags Tab ................................................................................................................................................................. 204  
IO Tab ...................................................................................................................................................................... 204  
Demand Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 205  
Harmonic Tab .......................................................................................................................................................... 206  
Setpoints Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 207  
Power Tab................................................................................................................................................................ 208  
SR750/760 FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY .................................................................................................................. 209  
Metering Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 210  
Status Tab................................................................................................................................................................. 211  
Fault Tab.................................................................................................................................................................. 211  
Trip Tab.................................................................................................................................................................... 212  
Demand Tab............................................................................................................................................................. 213  
Logic Tab ................................................................................................................................................................. 214  
IO Tab ...................................................................................................................................................................... 214  
Setpoints Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 215  
FANUC 90/30 ................................................................................................................................................................ 216  
FANUC 90/70 ................................................................................................................................................................ 216  
FANUC MICRO 90.......................................................................................................................................................... 217  
MX200 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 218  
Metering Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 218  
vi Contents  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup Tab ................................................................................................................................................................. 220  
GEN PLC..................................................................................................................................................................... 223  
Master Tab............................................................................................................................................................... 223  
Generator Tab.......................................................................................................................................................... 224  
PSG.......................................................................................................................................................................... 225  
EPM5300P................................................................................................................................................................... 227  
Metering Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 227  
Setup One Tab.......................................................................................................................................................... 229  
Setup Two Tab.......................................................................................................................................................... 230  
EPM5200P................................................................................................................................................................... 232  
Metering Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 232  
Setup One Tab.......................................................................................................................................................... 233  
EPM5350P................................................................................................................................................................... 235  
Metering Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 235  
Setup One Tab.......................................................................................................................................................... 236  
Setup Two Tab.......................................................................................................................................................... 237  
EPM5000P................................................................................................................................................................... 239  
Metering................................................................................................................................................................... 239  
Setup......................................................................................................................................................................... 240  
EPM9450Q/EPM9650Q .............................................................................................................................................. 241  
Metering................................................................................................................................................................... 241  
Min/Max................................................................................................................................................................... 242  
Demand.................................................................................................................................................................... 243  
Thermal Average...................................................................................................................................................... 244  
Digital Inputs ........................................................................................................................................................... 245  
Setup......................................................................................................................................................................... 246  
EPM7430D/EPM7450D .............................................................................................................................................. 247  
Metering................................................................................................................................................................... 247  
Min/Max................................................................................................................................................................... 248  
Limits........................................................................................................................................................................ 249  
Setup......................................................................................................................................................................... 251  
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................................................................ 252  
ASSERTION ERROR........................................................................................................................................................ 252  
EPM 3710/EPM 3720 – NO DATA OR INCORRECT DATA DISPLAYED ............................................................................ 252  
EPM 3720 – KVAH IMPORT VALUES INCORRECT........................................................................................................ 252  
LONG UPDATE WHEN CHANGING SETPOINTS.................................................................................................................. 252  
PLEPM – WRONG METERING TAB DISPLAYED............................................................................................................. 252  
INTOUCH APPLICATIONS – WINDOWS NOT DISPLAYED PROPERLY................................................................................. 253  
APPENDIX A: EPM 3720 SLIDING WINDOW DEMAND KEYS ......................................................................... 255  
DOWNLOADING SLIDING DEMAND WINDOW KEYS TO THE EPM 3720......................................................................... 255  
APPENDIX B: AUTOMATIC WAVEFORM CAPTURE AND WAVEFORM RETRIEVAL ON EPM3720.... 263  
USING A SETPOINT TO TRIGGER WAVEFORM CAPTURE OR RECORD ON THE EPM 3720 ................................................. 263  
APPENDIX C: EPM 7700 - SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS ................................................................................... 279  
EPM 7700 TAGS SUBJECT TO DEACTIVATION BY TABULAR DATA SCREEN WIZARD ................................................... 279  
INDEX............................................................................................................................................................................. 293  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Contents vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Welcome  
The PMCS Interface Toolkit is a POWER LEADER Power Management Control  
System (PMCS) version 6.11a tool that provides a custom toolkit to efficiently create  
flexible, accurate, and friendly user interfaces to your power management data. With  
the PMCS Wizards (accurate graphical representations of power management  
devices and other commonly encountered objects), you can create applications to  
provide a customized interface that accurately represents physical, electrical, and  
geographical plant layouts. The wizards can significantly cut new system  
development time, providing results in less than an hour.  
The PMCS Interface Toolkit allows you to create one-line diagrams, elevation views,  
and floor plans that you can combine with tabular data screens and three-dimensional  
device wizards to create a virtual representation of your facility and equipment. With  
this graphical user interface, you actually see and control devices on the screen,  
without having to make a trip out to the meter or trip unit.  
The Toolkit, which consists of the Wonderware InTouch development environment  
coupled with GE’s wizards, is easy to use, taking advantage of state-of-the-art drag-  
and-drop technology. Wizards are provided for all the devices most commonly used  
with the PMCS DDE Server. Creating a custom interface is as easy as selecting  
wizards for the devices installed in a facility and placing them on the screen.  
Here’s what you’ll find in this guide:  
Chapter 2 explains the kinds of PMCS Wizards, their use and  
configuration – Small Faceplate wizards, Large Faceplate wizards,  
Tabular Data Screen wizards, One- Line wizards, Elevation wizards,  
and Floor Plan wizards.  
Chapter 3 illustrates the use of the GE wizards described in Chapter 2  
to create animated displays of the facility floor plan, switchgear  
elevations, and system one- line diagrams.  
Chapter 4 gives an example of application development, using the  
wizards described in Chapters 2 and 3 to create an actual PMCS  
application.  
Chapter 5 describes the functions available with each of the GE Large  
Faceplate wizards. These wizards are accurate graphical representations  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
of power management devices, complete with working controls that are  
linked to the corresponding devices in your facility.  
Chapter 6 describes the Tabular Data wizards. These wizards list the  
data and setpoints of power management devices in a tabular format.  
Simply point and click to select the appropriate tab of information to  
display and view the related data.  
The examples and references in this guide enable you to create custom interfaces for  
your PMCS system, and allow you to access power management data in the way that  
best suits you.  
How should I use this manual?  
How you use this book depends on your level of expertise with Wonderware  
InTouch. Consult the table below to determine where you should start.  
If this describes you…  
Start here:  
I’ve never seen this stuff before! What’s  
Wonderware InTouch? What are  
“Wizards”?  
Refer to the documentation that came with your  
Wonderware InTouch package. Start with the  
introduction and tutorial sections, which will teach you  
about Wonderware InTouch and how to use it to create  
custom applications. When you understand what wizards  
are and how to use them, come back here.  
I’ve just opened this package – where do I  
go first?  
Go to Chapter 1, Introduction. Chapter 1 explains what  
the User Screen Configurator is, what it’s good for, and  
where to go after that.  
I’m familiar with Wonderware InTouch  
and I’d like to build a custom application  
for some GE power management devices.  
Go to Chapter 1 for installation instructions, then to  
Chapter 2 for descriptions of the wizards and how to use  
them. Chapter 4 provides a demo of actual application  
development. This package contains wizards for the  
power management devices supported by GE’s PMCS  
6.11a software.  
The GE PMCS Wizards are already  
installed on my system, I’m already  
experienced with InTouch, and I’m ready  
to start building custom applications.  
Turn to Chapter 2 for information on how to use the GE  
PMCS Wizards, and Chapter 4 for a quick example of  
application development. For detailed descriptions of  
the Large Faceplate wizards or the Tabular Data Screen  
wizards, refer to Chapters 5 and 6 respectively.  
Just tell me about the wizards; I’m an old  
pro and ready to go!  
Skim through Chapters 2 and 3 for an overview of  
what’s in the package, then Chapter 4 for a quick  
example of application development. Chapter 5  
describes the GE Large Faceplate wizards and Chapter 6  
the associated Tabular Data Screen wizards.  
2
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Conventions  
You will find this book easy to use if you look for these simple conventions:  
Boldface type indicates the name of an item you need to select.  
Monospace type indicates an example or text that is displayed on the  
screen.  
UPPERCASE type indicates a file name, command name, or acronym.  
About the Interface Toolkit  
The Interface Toolkit consists of the Wonderware InTouch development  
environment and a special set of wizards developed for use with the power  
management devices supported by PMCS.  
Installation  
To install the Interface Toolkit from the CD-ROM, refer to the instructions provided  
in GEH-6514, Read This Book First.  
When InTouch is successfully installed, you must add the PMCS wizards to  
InTouch’s library of available wizards.  
To add the wizards to InTouch, start InTouch and enter Development mode. Pull  
down the Special menu and select Configure > Wizard.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
From the InTouch Configuration menu, select Install Wizards.  
The Wizard Installation dialog displays two list boxes, showing the currently  
installed wizards and the wizards available for installation. Select the desired wizards  
from the bottom box and click Install. When the installation is complete, click Done.  
Exit from the InTouch Configuration dialog box by clicking OK. The PMCS wizards  
should now be loaded and ready for use.  
4
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using and Configuring  
PMCS Wizards  
About the Wizards  
The wizards contained in the PMCS Interface Toolkit allow you to quickly build  
accurate and friendly user interfaces with InTouch. In addition to the various wizards  
standard with InTouch development systems, the Interface Toolkit provides six types  
of powerful GE wizards:  
GE Small Faceplates  
GE Large Faceplates  
GE Tabular Screens  
GE One-Line Tools  
GE Elevation Wizards  
GE Floor Plan Wizards  
The five-step procedure below outlines how to use InTouch wizards.  
1. From InTouch, either create a new window or open an existing window  
to modify.  
2. Select the wizards button  
from the floating toolbars. The Wizard  
Selection dialog box pops up.  
3. Select the class of wizard from the list of wizards on the left side of the  
Wizard Selection dialog. Several classes contain too many devices to fit  
on one palette and have been broken up into several palettes; for  
example; Small Faceplates 1 and Small Faceplates 2.  
4. Double-click on the desired wizard, then click on the window to place  
the wizard.  
5. Once the wizard has been placed, double-click anywhere on the wizard  
to open a configuration dialog (if appropriate), and complete any  
necessary configuration based on the instructions later in this chapter.  
The remainder of this chapter is devoted to describing and illustrating the various  
kinds of wizards included in the PMCS Interface Toolkit.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Small Faceplate Wizards  
Usage  
The Small Faceplate wizards are icon-sized graphics typically used to create accurate  
elevation views and one-line diagrams. These wizards are provided with logic to  
open another window, typically either a Large Faceplate or Tabular Data Screen  
wizard. There are two palettes of Small Faceplates to choose from.  
Configuration  
In development mode, after placing the Small Faceplate, double-click on the icon to  
open the Small Faceplate Dialog box, as illustrated below. Typically, a Small  
Faceplate wizard is linked to a window containing either a Large Faceplate or a  
Tabular Data Screen wizard. You can move or resize Small Faceplate wizards in the  
window as desired.  
6
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enter the name of the window  
to open when the icon is  
clicked on during runtime.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Large Faceplate Wizards  
Usage  
Large Faceplate wizards are three-dimensional representations of device faceplates  
that can be used to display data from the device. These three-dimensional wizards  
include extensive logic that provides an accurate reproduction of the actual display  
and keys of the device. Large Faceplate wizards are typically placed in overlay  
windows.  
8
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Place the Large Faceplate wizard into an open window, then double-click on it to  
display the Large Faceplate Dialog box. Configure the wizard by entering the  
appropriate information into each of the boxes.  
The figure shown below is the dialog for a typical wizard. Some wizards have  
additional features which may be configured. See the section titled Features of GE  
Large Faceplate Wizards for more details.  
Enter the unique eight-character  
name matching the appropriate Topic  
in the PMCS DDE Server.  
Enter the application name of the  
PMCS DDE Server (GE32MODB or  
GE32MTCP) for most PMCS  
devices; ION_LINK for EPM 7700  
devices).  
Enter the minimum security  
level for enabling remote  
command functions.  
Enter the name of the window to  
open when the device display is  
clicked on during runtime.  
You can move and resize Large Faceplate wizards as desired.  
Special Considerations  
The button controls on the 3-D representation emulate the controls of the actual  
device. This may be useful for reducing software training time for personnel already  
familiar with device operation. The detailed features of each of the Large Faceplate  
wizards are described in the section titled Features of GE Large Faceplate  
Wizards .  
EPM 7700  
The EPM 7700 Large Faceplate Dialog box contains an extra field, which must be  
completed during configuration. The Node Name field requires that you enter the  
name of the computer running the Communications Server that connects to this  
particular device. Depending on the configuration of the EPM7700 network, this can  
be either the Primary node computer, or a computer setup as a "Full Station"  
Secondary node. Refer to DEH-40035, the GE 7700 Gateway Users Guide, and  
GEH-6514, PMCS Read This Book First, for more information on network  
configuration. The Node Name field is required because the EPM7700 does not use  
the same DDE server as the rest of the standard PMCS devices, and the wizard must  
be directed to the location of the correct Communications Server for proper  
configuration of DDE topic names.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Also, the Application Name field must be completed as ION_LINK rather than  
GE32MODB or GE32MTCP for the EPM7700 device. The ION LINK program is  
installed during initial PMCS 6.11a setup if the EPM7700 software option is selected.  
When configuring Wizards on Secondary nodes, the Application Name field entry  
does not follow the PMCS wizard convention of “\\RemoteComputer\ION_LINK”.  
EPM7700 Secondary nodes run a local copy of the ION LINK server, thus the  
application name for EPM7700 Large Faceplate wizards is always “ION_LINK”  
whether the wizard is installed on the Primary node or a Secondary node. The Node  
Name entry determines if the wizard is on a Secondary node.  
Finally, the EPM 7700 device type requires special InTouch scripting for the large  
faceplate wizard. Refer to the section at the end of this chapter titled Special  
Scripting Considerations for the EPM 7700.  
10  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tabular Data Screen Wizards  
Usage  
Tabular Data Screen wizards contain organized, comprehensive, tabular layouts of  
device parameters including additional configuration and remote control features.  
Depending on the device, there may be multiple file-tabs beneath the tabular data  
section. These switch among various pages relating to data and setpoints.  
Each Tabular Data Screen wizard contains buttons for activating the help file, trend  
window, setup window (if applicable), Event Logger, Waveform Capture, and for  
closing the window.  
You can move and resize Tabular Data Screen wizards as desired.  
Configuration  
In development mode, after placing a wizard into an open window, double-click on it  
to display the Tabular Data Dialog box. The figure below shows the dialog box for a  
typical Tabular Data wizard. Some wizards have additional features which may be  
configured. See the section titled Features of Tabular Data Screen Wizards for  
more details.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enter the unique eight- character  
name matching the appropriate  
Topic in the PMCS DDE Server.  
Use the Group Name field to logically group devices,  
if desired. Enter the name of the group to which the  
device belongs.  
Enter the application name of  
the PMCS DDE Server  
(GE32MODB or GE32MTCP).  
Enter the minimum security level  
for enabling remote command  
and setup functions.  
Enter the name of the window to  
be opened when the Trend  
button is clicked on during  
runtime.  
Enter the name of the window to  
be opened when the Setup  
button is clicked on during  
runtime.  
EPM 7700  
The EPM 7700 Tabular Data Dialog box is slightly different from the other PMCS  
device types, containing two extra fields and requiring minor differences in  
configuration. The Tabular Data Dialog for the EPM 7700 is shown below, followed  
by the special configuration requirements.  
The Node Name field requires that you enter the name of the computer running the  
Communications Server that connects to this particular device. Depending on the  
configuration of the EPM7700 network, this can be either the Primary node  
computer, or a computer setup as a “Full Station” Secondary node. Refer to DEH-  
12  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40035, the GE 7700 Gateway Users Guide, and GEH-6514, PMCS Read This Book  
First, for more information on network configuration. The Node Name field is  
required because the EPM7700 does not use the same DDE server as the rest of the  
standard PMCS devices, and the wizard must be directed to the location of the  
correct Communications Server for proper configuration of DDE topic names.  
Also, the Application Name field must be completed as ION_LINK rather than  
GE32MODB or GE32MTCP for the EPM7700 device. The ION LINK program is  
installed during initial PMCS setup if the EPM7700 software option is selected.  
When configuring Wizards on Secondary nodes, the Application Name field entry  
does not follow the PMCS wizard convention of “\\RemoteComputer\ION_LINK”.  
EPM7700 Secondary nodes run a local copy of the ION LINK server, thus the  
application name for EPM7700 Tabular Data Wizards is always “ION_LINK”  
whether the wizard is installed on the Primary node or a Secondary node. The Node  
Name entry determines if the wizard is on a Secondary node.  
The Gateway Name field must be completed with GE77GTWY, the application name  
of the GE 7700 Gateway Server program. When configuring the EPM7700 Tabular  
wizard on a Secondary node, the Gateway Name does follow the PMCS wizard  
convention of “\\RemoteComputer\GE77GTWY” in the Gateway Name field, where  
‘RemoteComputer’ is the name of the PC where the GE 7700 Gateway application is  
running – the Primary Node. The following example shows a Tabular Data Dialog  
box as it would appear when configuring a Tabular Data wizard on a Secondary  
node. The Node Name field contains the name of the Primary Node computer, the  
Application Name field is ION_LINK (as it is for ALL EPM7700 wizards on ANY  
node) and the Gateway Name field points to the GE 7700 Gateway Server running on  
the Primary Node PC.  
Finally, the EPM 7700 device type requires special InTouch scripting for the tabular  
data screen wizard. Refer to the section at the end of this chapter titled Special  
Scripting Considerations for the EPM 7700.  
Refer to DEH-40035 for information on the Communications Server and 7700  
Gateway Server.  
369 Motor Management Relay  
The 369 Motor Management Relay offers an optional Remote RTD module, which  
can provide support for up to 12 additional RTDs. Accordingly, the 369 Tabular  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Data Dialog box has an extra field for indicating when the RRTD option is installed.  
Be sure to select the correct RRTD option when completing the 369's Tabular Data  
Dialog window. If you are not planning to use an RRTD module with your relay,  
select the "No" button. This minimizes the number of I/O tags created by the wizard,  
providing better performance.  
14  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Universal Relay  
The Universal Relay device comes in several different models, and each model  
supports different capabilities, which are reflected by the various tabs available for  
each model. When configuring a Universal Relay device, you first select the UR  
Model, then choose which tabs will be displayed for the particular device.  
The UR devices are also capable of communicating with a different type of PMCS  
DDE Server than the other PMCS Advanced Wizards. By selecting the UCA/MMS  
checkbox, you indicate that you wish the UR wizard to retrieve its data for display  
from the MMS Server whose name is entered in the Application Name field.  
Complete the Application Name  
field; typically GE32MODB or  
GE32MTCP.  
Special Note:  
The UCA/MMS is not supported in  
this version. So don’t Check this  
checkbox.  
Select the Model of UR which you are  
configuring. This determines the  
contents of the Available Tabs list.  
Highlight the tabs you wish to display  
on the Tabular Data Screen wizard.  
Use the control key to select multiple  
tabs.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One-Line Wizards  
Usage  
You can use one-line wizards to create animated one-line diagrams that represent an  
electrical schematic of the devices monitored by the software. These wizards are  
provided with logic to either open another window or display device status.  
One-Line wizards are divided into five functional groups according to the type of  
animation:  
Horizontal and Vertical Meter wizards display another window, such as  
a 3-D faceplate.  
Transformer, Fuse, Ground Symbol, and Motor Symbol wizards have a  
discrete color-change animation indicating the On/Off state of the  
device.  
Horizontal and Vertical Relay wizards also have discrete color-change  
animation indicating the On/Off state of the device.  
Horizontal and Vertical Switch wizards have four discrete animations;  
two are color changes indicating the On/Off state of the device and two  
are used for a three-state display (Open, Closed, and Error conditions).  
16  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Circuit Breaker wizards have two discrete color-change animations for  
On/Off status display and one analog animation for a five-state display  
(Open, Closed, Out, Trip, and Error conditions).  
Lockout/Tagout symbols have discrete visibility animations for various  
tags. Refer to the section Using and Configuring PMCS Wizards:  
Lockout/Tagout Wizard for more information.  
Configuration  
In development mode, after placing the one-line device icon, double-click on the icon  
to open its configuration dialog box. All one-line wizards have two configuration  
items in common:  
Line Size is a number between 1 and 20 that sets the pixel width of  
the lines in the wizard.  
Size configuration consists of three radio buttons (Small, Medium,  
and Large) that determine the overall size of the wizard on the screen.  
Use the snap-to-grid feature in InTouch to quickly align One-Line wizards.  
Configuration of each of the five classes of One-Line wizards is described below.  
Meter One-Line Wizards  
After placing a meter wizard in a window, double-click on it to display the dialog  
box shown below. Configure the wizard by entering the appropriate information into  
each of the boxes.  
Enter the name of the  
window to open when the  
icon is clicked on during  
runtime.  
Select the color of the meter  
wizard.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transformer, Fuse, Ground, and Motor One-Line  
Wizards  
After placing a Fuse, Ground, or Motor wizard in a window, double-click on it to  
display the dialog box shown below. Configure the wizard by entering the  
appropriate information into each of the boxes.  
Enter the name of the  
InTouch discrete tag that  
determines the state of the  
line colors during runtime.  
Specify the colors of the lines  
when the Bus Status is On and  
Off. The wizard is displayed in  
the On Color when the Bus  
Status Tagname = 1, Off Color  
when the Bus Status Tagname =  
0.  
The dialog box for the Transformer wizard has an extra check box that specifies  
either an air-core or iron-core transformer, as shown below.  
Click on the check  
box to specify an  
air-core  
transformer.  
18  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Horizontal and Vertical Relay One-Line Wizards  
After placing a Horizontal or Vertical Relay wizard in a window, double-click on it  
to display the dialog box shown below. Configure the wizard by entering the  
appropriate information into each of the boxes.  
Enter the name of the InTouch discrete  
Enter the name of the InTouch discrete tag that  
determines the color of the line to the left (or bottom)  
of the relay symbol during runtime.  
tag that determines the color of the line  
to the right (or top) of the relay symbol  
during runtime.  
Click the check box to  
display a slash through the  
contacts (normally closed  
contact).  
Specify the colors of the  
wizard elements when the  
contact status and  
connection discrete tags  
are On or Off.  
Enter the name of the InTouch discrete tag  
that determines the color of the relay  
symbol during runtime.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Horizontal and Vertical Switch One-Line Wizards  
After placing a Horizontal or Vertical Switch wizard in a window, double-click on it  
to display the dialog box shown below. Configure the wizard by entering the  
appropriate information into each of the boxes.  
Enter the name of the InTouch discrete  
Enter the name of the InTouch discrete tag  
tag that determines the color of the line  
to the left (or bottom) of the switch  
symbol during runtime.  
that determines the color of the line to the  
right (or top) of the switch symbol during  
runtime.  
Enter the names of the  
InTouch discrete tags that  
determine the state of the  
switch during runtime.  
Specify the colors of the wizard  
elements when the connection  
and switch discrete tags are On  
and Off and when there is an  
Error condition. The switch  
symbol color is determined by  
the following logic:  
SwOpen SwClosed Color  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
error  
on  
off  
error  
20  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Circuit Breaker One-Line Wizards  
After placing a Horizontal or Vertical Circuit Breaker wizard in a window, double-  
click on it to display the dialog box shown below. Configure the wizard by entering  
the appropriate information into each of the boxes.  
Enter the name of the InTouch discrete tag that  
determines the color of the line to the right (or  
top) of the breaker symbol during runtime.  
Enter text to display next to the  
breaker graphic during runtime  
(optional).  
Enter the name of  
the InTouch discrete  
tag that determines  
the color of the line  
to the left (or bottom)  
of the breaker  
symbol during  
runtime.  
Specify the colors of the wizard  
elements and status text for the  
breaker states during runtime.  
See the table below for default  
status/color mappings.  
Enter the name of the InTouch analog tag that  
determines the color of the circuit breaker  
symbol, the state of the breaker, and the status  
text displayed next to the breaker icon during  
runtime.  
The breaker status values and the associated default colors are listed in the table  
below. Error status indicates that the breaker status inputs create an indeterminate  
state for the breaker.  
Breaker Status  
Value  
Text  
Default Color  
Open  
1
3
5
7
9
OPN  
CLD  
OUT  
TRP  
ERR  
Green  
Closed  
Drawn Out  
Tripped  
Error  
Red  
Green  
Yellow  
Flashing Red  
Breaker status values & display colors.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Elevation Wizards  
Usage  
Elevation wizards are graphical elements that represent switchgear components  
useful for creating 3-D elevation views. These wizards are not associated with any  
logic or animation, but are provided to create more visually accurate screens and  
representations of equipment. Device icon wizards are typically placed on the  
Elevation wizards to show the breakers, trip units, and meters and provide navigation  
to device 3-D wizards, tabular displays, or arbitrary windows.  
Configuration  
After placing an Elevation wizard in an open window, it may be moved or resized,  
but no other configuration is possible. Elevation wizards are not provided with logic  
for opening another window.  
22  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Floor Plan Wizards  
Usage  
Floor Plan wizards are graphical elements that are useful for creating accurate  
representations of a facility layout. You can use a floor layout as an overview display  
of an entire plant, with animated areas for navigation to various switchgear elevation  
views or one-line diagrams. You can paste miniature elevation views as bitmap  
objects onto the floor layout, sized to fit, and then animate them as push buttons to  
display elevation views or one-line diagrams (see Chapter 3).  
Configuration  
After placing a Floor Plan wizard in an open window, it may be moved or resized,  
but no other configuration is possible. Floor Plan wizards are not provided with logic  
for opening another window.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Toolbar Wizard  
Usage  
The Toolbar wizard is a navigational tool which allows the user to move between  
recently-used or frequently-used windows, and provides a clock for quick reference.  
The first/last arrows jump to the first or last window in the windows list (see  
Configuration below); the inner forward and back arrows move to the next or  
previous window in the list. The window buttons to the right of the arrows provide  
quick access to the windows assigned to each button.  
Configuration  
The arrow buttons on the Toolbar wizard operate by maintaining a list of windows  
for access by the toolbar navigational controls. To allow a window to be added to the  
windows list when viewed by a user, a call to WLAddWindow( ) must be placed in  
the OnShow window script. This call must be placed in each window that you want to  
have on the window list.  
The eight hot buttons are configured by double clicking on the wizard, and  
completing the Toolbar Wizard Edit dialog box:  
For each button, you can set the top and bottom caption, and specify the window to  
be opened when that button is clicked.  
24  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Annunciator Panel Wizard  
Usage  
The Annunciator Panel wizard provides an industrial-style annunciator display panel,  
consisting of a bank of 48 indicator lights which change colors and blink to indicate  
various device conditions. For instance, a circuit breaker could be associated with an  
annunciator panel wizard to display grey when closed and change to red if it trips.  
This wizard requires the PMCS Event Logger software to be installed and properly  
configured before it can be used, because it operates by monitoring special DDE tags  
which change state based on alarms or events recorded by the Event Logger.  
The panel consists of an array of 48 buttons (six columns by eight rows), each of  
which may be labeled with up to three lines of text, and each of which is associated  
with a particular device (topic) at the PMCS DDE Server.  
The annunciator panel wizard provides buttons for acknowledging alarms, resetting  
acknowledged alarms, and for viewing an alarm summary via the PMCS Event  
Logger.  
Annunciator Panel Theory of Operation  
The Annunciator Panel wizard provides a screen full of indicator tiles, each relating  
to a particular device, event, or group of events. These tiles are displayed in different  
colors to indicate different alarm conditions. The Annunciator Panel wizard monitors  
selected DDE items in the Event Logger and responds to changes of state in these  
items by changing the colors of individual indicator tiles. For example, you might  
configure a relay trip event to have a tile in the Annunciator Panel wizard. The  
wizard monitors a DDE tag at the Event Logger corresponding to the trip status of  
the relay and displays a grey indicator if the relay is operating properly, and a red  
indicator if the relay has tripped.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
From the Event Logger’s perspective, there are two parts to configuring the  
Annunciator Panel. First, each DDE Item that will be displayed on the Annunciator  
Panel wizard must be added (using the Add Items dialog). For the example we’re  
discussing, we’ll assume you’ve created a DDE Item named Trip1. Each DDE item  
will connect to an individual tile in the Annunciator Panel wizard.  
The second part consists of defining events which will turn individual DDE items ON  
or OFF. Each DDE item (or Annunciator Panel tile) can be turned on or off by any  
number of device events you define. The events are logically ORed together to  
determine ON or OFF conditions; i.e., if any of the events occurs, the DDE item is  
ON; if none of the events have occurred, the DDE item remains OFF.  
We’ll continue the relay example we began above. For example, you might configure  
the Trip1 DDE Item to be ON if any of the following events occurs: the relay is  
tripped, or the relay reports an error condition, or the relay senses an overvoltage  
condition. The Annunciator Panel wizard displays a grey indicator tile for the relay  
for as long as the DDE item remains in the OFF condition. If the Annunciator Panel  
wizard sees the DDE Item change from OFF to ON, it reacts by changing the  
indicator tile from grey to red. The Event Logger Annunciator Panel logic will also  
change the state of a DDE Item in response to actions performed at the Annunciator  
Panel Wizard. The user can both acknowledge and reset individual Annunciator DDE  
Items. The following diagram shows the relationship of the Annunciator Panel  
wizard, the Event Logger, and the PMCS DDE Server.  
26  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Annunciator Panel Wizard monitors DDE Items at Event Logger  
Relay 1  
(green)  
Relay 2  
(green)  
Relay 3  
(green)  
DDE Item Name: Trip1  
Status:  
OFF  
Configured Events  
Relay Tripped?  
Error Condition?  
Received  
NO  
NO  
Event Logger  
tracks events  
reported by  
PMCS DDE  
Server  
Overvoltage Condition? NO  
Annunciator Panel Wizard  
Event Logger  
Relay 1  
Relay 2  
Relay 3  
PMCS  
DDE Server  
Annunciator Panel Wizard monitors DDE Items at Event Logger  
Relay 1  
(red)  
Relay 2  
(green)  
Relay 3  
(green)  
DDE Item Name: Trip1  
Status:  
ON  
Configured Events  
Relay Tripped?  
Error Condition?  
Received  
YES  
NO  
Event Logger  
tracks events  
reported by  
PMCS DDE  
Server  
Overvoltage Condition? NO  
Annunciator Panel Wizard  
Event Logger  
Relay 1  
Relay 2  
Relay 3  
PMCS  
DDE Server  
In the upper illustration, the Event Logger watches for any of the three events  
configured to cause a change of state to the Trip 1 DDE Item. None of these three  
events have occurred, so the status of the Trip 1 DDE Item is at OFF. The  
Annunciator Panel wizard is monitoring the configured DDE Items at the Event  
Logger, but all DDE Items are “OFF” so the Annunciator Panel displays green  
indicator tiles.  
In the lower illustration, the Event Logger has recorded a “Trip” event for the unit in  
question, and changed the state of the Trip 1 DDE Item to “ON”. The Annunciator  
Panel wizard sees this change, and responds by changing the color of the annunciator  
panel tile for Relay 1 to red.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Each "Alarm indicator" as defined by the Event Logger will appear to InTouch as a  
DDE Integer item which can have the following values/states:  
State  
Tag  
Value  
Default  
Color  
Normal (no alarm)  
10 - 19  
20 - 29  
30 - 39  
40 - 49  
Solid Gray  
Red Blinking  
Solid Red  
Alarm Active - Unacknowledged  
Alarm Active - Acknowledged  
Alarm Reset - Unacknowledged  
(alarm occurred but later went off before being  
acknowledged)  
Solid Yellow  
Alarm Disabled  
0
Dark Gray  
(Event Logger has disabled this alarm indicator)  
Each panel button displays one of five different colors, based on the states defined  
above. A fill color animation link controlled by an indirect integer tag is used to  
change colors. The fill color link is set as follows:  
<= 9: Dark Grey  
10 -> 19: Grey  
20-> 29: Grey (will also have a flashing Red animation link)  
30 -> 39: Red  
>= 40: Yellow  
28  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Note: Prior to configuring an Annunciator Panel Wizard, you should have completed  
configuration of the Annunciator Panel Items at the PMCS Event Logger. Refer to  
GEH-6512, PMCS Event Logger Users Guide, for details.  
When the Annunciator Panel wizard is dropped, it appears as a blank panel of 48  
indicators:  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Double-click on the wizard to display the Annunciator Panel  
Dialog:  
Complete the Annunciator Panel Name field (up to 8 characters), and the Security  
Access Level (level of security required to Reset any Acknowledged alarms. The  
color codes for different alarm states can be modified by clicking on each color. Note  
that the color codes apply to all 48 indicators on the annunciator panel wizard.  
Finally, click on an indicator to display the configuration dialog for that individual  
button:  
30  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enter the text to display on any of the three lines available for the selected button. It  
is not necessary to enter text on all three lines. Click OK when you have finished  
assigning text labels to the button.  
As each annunciator panel button is labeled, the Annunciator Panel Dialog reflects  
these changes by showing the Row/Column coordinates of the labeled buttons:  
When you have finished labeling your annunciator panel buttons, click OK to close  
the Annunciator Panel Dialog box. When you close this dialog box, InTouch  
automatically creates indirect analog tags for each panel button. These tags are  
named xxx_R1C1 through xxx_R8C6, where xxx is the name assigned to the wizard  
(for example, Panel1), and R1C1 indicates the row and column position on the  
annunicator panel.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Two steps remain after the wizard has been configured.  
First, InTouch DDE Integer tags must be created for the DDE items configured in the  
Event Logger corresponding to the Alarm Panels. Make sure the DDE Item names  
created in InTouch match the DDE Item names configured in Event Logger. (If you  
are unsure of how to create DDE tags in InTouch, please refer to WonderWare’s  
documentation.) The DDE Access name for the Event Logger should be configured  
in InTouch as follows:  
Second, an InTouch script must be written to associate the InTouch indirect tags  
created by the wizard with the InTouch DDE tags created for DDE Items in Event  
Logger. Typically, this script is placed in the InTouch “On Startup” application  
script.  
32  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
An example of a simple script is shown below:  
Panel1_R1C1.Name = ANN_P_1A.Name;  
Panel1_R1C2.Name = ANN_P_1B.Name;  
Panel1_R1C3.Name = ANN_P_2A.Name;  
At run-time, InTouch will receive DDE data from the Event Logger which will  
control the colors of all indicators that have been configured properly.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Tips for the Annunciator Panel  
Wizard  
Make sure that all DDE Items associated with the annunciator panel  
have been created in the Event Logger.  
You must create associated InTouch DDE Integer Tags by hand in the  
InTouch tagname database. The DDE Access name for the tags should  
use “EVENTLOG” for the Application Name and “SYSTEM” for the  
Topic Name. Make sure the “Request Initial Data” option is selected  
for this DDE Access name.  
Check the WWLogger at runtime for possible DDE errors.  
Make sure your application script is mapping the proper DDE tags with  
the proper indirect tags.  
Make sure the Event Logger is running before starting InTouch  
Windowviewer.  
34  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Custom Table Wizard  
Usage  
The Tabular Data Screen wizards provide the ability to view extensive device data in  
tabular form. However, they do not allow you to select the data to view - you must  
view all the data presented and locate the particular data points you are interested in.  
The Custom Table wizard differs from the Tabular Data wizards by providing an  
easy-to-use, highly-flexible way to view a limited number of registers for a particular  
device. It presents only the data you are interested in, displaying it in a convenient  
table format as shown above. Each table consists of 1 to 12 rows of information, one  
register per row.  
Each table takes up approximately one-quarter of an average display, so up to four  
Custom Table wizards may be placed on a screen.  
Configuration  
When the Custom Table wizard is dropped, it appears as a blank screen. Double-  
click on the wizard to display the Custom Table Dialog:  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Begin configuring the Custom Table by completing the following fields:  
Field  
Description  
Device Name  
Enter the name of the device (topic). Must  
exactly match the topic name at the DDE  
Server.  
DDE Server Name  
Device Description  
Enter the name of the PMCS DDE Server.  
Optionally, enter a brief description of this  
device, up to 32 characters maximum.  
Device Type  
Select the device type corresponding to this  
topic.  
36  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPM 7700 Users Only: When the EPM 7700 device type is selected, an additional  
field appears in the Custom Table Dialog box, adjacent to the Device Name (shown  
below).  
The Node Name field requires that you enter the name of the computer on which the  
meter’s Communications Server is located, either the Primary Node or a Full Station  
Secondary Node. This field is required because the EPM 7700 does not use the same  
DDE Server as the rest of the standard PMCS devices, and the wizard must be  
directed to the location of the correct Communications Server for proper  
configuration of DDE topic names. For more information on configuring EPM7700  
networks, refer to DEH-40035, the GE 7700 Gateway Users Guide, and GEH-6514,  
PMCS Read This Book First.  
Also, the Application name field must be completed as ION_LINK rather than  
GE32MODB or GE32MTCP for the EPM7700 device. The ION LINK program is  
installed during initial PMCS setup if the EPM7700 software option is selected.  
When configuring Custom Tabular wizards on Secondary nodes, the Application  
Name field entry does not follow the PMCS wizard convention of  
“\\RemoteComputer\ION_LINK”. EPM7700 Secondary nodes run a local copy of the  
ION LINK server; thus the application name is always “ION_LINK” whether the  
wizard is installed on the Primary node or a Secondary node.  
Finally, the EPM 7700 device type requires special InTouch scripting for the custom  
tabular wizard. Refer to the section at the end of this chapter titled Special Scripting  
Considerations for the EPM 7700.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When these fields are completed, click the Select Multiple Tags button to select  
several tags at once, or click the Select Tag X button to assign tags one at a time. The  
Select Device Tags dialog appears:  
The Select Device Tags dialog shows a list of all the pre-configured tags which the  
Custom Table wizard supports for the selected device type, sorted by address, and  
displaying the tagname and description. Most tags are metering value registers.  
Select up to twelve tags from the list by clicking (high-lighting) each one. To de-  
select a tag, simply click it a second time. When you have selected up to 12 tags,  
click OK to return to the Custom Table dialog box. The selected tags will now be  
displayed as shown in the following example:  
38  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You may select OK to select this table configuration, or you may edit the tags one at  
a time using the Select Tag X buttons (for instance, if you wish to change the order  
the tags appear in).  
The tag descriptions and units may also be edited (useful for non-English  
applications), but caution is urged when modifying descriptions or units; it may be  
difficult to remember what they were originally if needed.  
Note for users of the MDP device type: This device uses a memory tag to scale many  
of the data values displayed in the wizard.: "DeviceName_CTRatio" (where  
DeviceName is the name entered for the device within the wizard). The wizard  
creates this tag within InTouch (memory tag with a format type of "Real"). The  
InTouch application must provide a value for this tag (usually entered by the user at  
run-time). If no value is entered at runtime, a value of zero will be used as the default  
value for this tag, and many of the metering data registers (AMPS A, B, C, etc) on  
this device type will appear as zero as well. See the MDP Tabular Data wizard for  
additional information. If the application has a Tabular Data Screen Wizard with the  
same device name as this wizard, then the end user can set the CTRatio tag value via  
the MDP Tabular Data Screen wizard.  
Note for users of the EPM7300 device type: The custom table wizard will display  
N/A for certain metering values when the PM Volts Mode parameter is set to Demo  
in the device. Please use the EPM 7300 Tabular Data Wizard to view these values  
when the device is in Demo mode.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Statistics Wizard  
Usage  
The System Statistics wizard is an informational tool which allows the user to view  
detailed statistics about the system, including port information from the DDE Server  
and disk information.  
The wizard consists of a single screen displaying Port Statistics on the top portion  
and disk information on the bottom. Statistics on up to eight COM ports are  
displayed. The user may page forward or backward eight ports at a time by clicking  
the Prev 8 Ports or Next 8 Ports button.  
Whenever a new DDE Server name is entered, the user must click the Refresh button  
to update the DDE links to correspond to the new parameters.  
Configuration  
When the wizard is dropped, the following dialog box appears:  
40  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Statistics wizard requires a name itself, and also the name of a DDE  
Server to access.  
By default, the System Statistics wizard assumes that the DDE Server is located  
locally and is named GE32MODB. You may change this to access a DDE Server  
located on a networked PC by entering the name as \\NODENAME\SERVER, where  
NODENAME is the name of the host PC and SERVER is the name of the PMCS  
DDE Server, which will be GE32MODB.  
During runtime, the default drive letter is C, corresponding to the local hard drive.  
You may change this value to any valid drive letter corresponding to either a fixed  
local drive or a mapped network drive.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lockout/Tagout Wizard  
Usage  
The Lockout/Tagout provides a method for assigning danger or ground tag graphics  
to various one-line diagrams or wizards.  
On-screen tags and indicators are for informational  
purposes only and DO NOT represent real-world  
conditions! Actual lockout status must be verified prior  
to performing any work. Failure to follow appropriate  
lockout procedures can result in SEVERE INJURY or  
DEATH!  
The Wizard consists of a single screen (shown above) displaying the presence or  
absence of danger and ground tags for a particular device. The user installs or  
removes Danger and/or Ground Tags using the Install/Remove buttons on the Tag  
Assignment window shown above. Any wizards belonging to the same Status Group  
will display Danger and/or Ground Tag indicators mirroring the tags installed in the  
Tag Assignment window.  
Supported Devices  
42  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Several PMCS breaker management devices support the Lockout/Tagout Wizard in  
their Large Faceplate and Tabular Data Screen wizards. These devices are:  
750 / 760 Feeder Management Relay  
Configuration  
When Lockout/Tagout wizard is dropped and double-clicked, the following dialog  
box appears:  
Complete the following fields to configure the Lockout/Tagout Panel Display:  
Enter a name for this panel. The Panel Name is used to distinguish the  
tags used internally by a particular instance of a panel from other panels  
within an application. Each panel within an application should have a  
unique Panel Name.  
Enter the name of the Status Group associated with this Lockout/Tagout  
Panel. The Status Group is the name that links this panel to  
Lockout/Tagout Online Symbols and the breaker management device  
wizards that can support it. It is important to remember the Status  
Group assignment since it must be used to configure the associated  
Oneline Symbols and IED wizards.  
Enter the minimum Security Level required to add and remove Danger  
or Ground tag symbols within the application.  
The second part of the Lockout/Tagout wizard that can be configured is the Oneline  
Tagout Symbol.  
The Oneline Tagout Symbol is a small wizard for placement in oneline diagrams, to  
be associated with a circuit breaker. It displays the presence or absence of any  
Danger or Ground tag symbols assigned to the breaker symbol by the PMCS user.  
After dropping the Oneline Tagout Symbol wizard onto a oneline diagram, associate  
it with a particular circuit breaker and any other devices you wish to have the tags  
displayed at by making it a member of a Status Group. The Oneline Tagout Symbol  
Dialog box is displayed when you double-click the wizard:  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Complete the following fields:  
Enter the name of the Status Group associated with this Lockout/Tagout  
symbol. The Status Group is the name that links this symbol to the  
Lockout/Tagout panel and the breaker management device wizards that  
can support it. It is important to remember the Status Group assignment  
since it must be used to configure the associated panel and IED wizards.  
Enter the name of the window to open when the Oneline Tagout  
Symbol wizard is clicked on during runtime. It should be the name of  
the window in which the Lockout/Tagout Panel is located.  
Example of Lockout/Tagout Wizard  
The following example may help clarify the use of the Lockout/Tagout wizard.  
Suppose that we have a breaker being monitored by a redundant pair of ML 750/760  
devices in our system. We wish to be able to display Lockout/Tagout symbols for this  
breaker.  
We create a oneline diagram in InTouch which represents this configuration, placing  
the circuit breaker wizard, then each of the ML 750/760 small faceplate wizards, then  
a Lockout/Tagout wizard for each ML 750/760 device. It looks like this:  
When configuring the Lockout/Tagout wizard in the oneline diagram, we complete  
the Oneline Tagout Symbol dialog as follows:  
44  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Breaker_Group_1 is the name of the Status Group we’ll assign to all wizards  
associated with this breaker; Tag Window is the name of the window we want to  
appear when someone clicks on the Oneline Tagout wizard during runtime.  
Next, we create separate screens containing Large Faceplate wizards and Tabular  
Data screen wizards for each ML 750/760 device. While configuring each wizard, we  
make sure that each one is given the Status Group “Breaker_Group_1”. This ensures  
that any Danger or Ground tag symbols present will be shown on any large faceplate,  
tabular data screen, or oneline wizards associated with this group. An example of the  
Tabular Data configuration dialog box is shown below; note that the Status Group  
field is assigned to Breaker_Group_1, the same Status Group as our Oneline Tagout  
Symbol wizard. Do not confuse the Status Group parameter with the Group Name  
parameter. The Group Name parameter is not used for configuring Lockout/Tagout  
Status Groups.  
We drop and configure our Lockout/Tagout Wizard next; double clicking this  
wizard, the Lockout/Tagout Panel dialog appears:  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
We name the Lockout/Tagout panel Panel_1. We associate the Panel with the same  
Status Group as our other wizards, Breaker_Group_1. Finally, we set the minimum  
security level required to add or remove tags.  
Now in Runtime mode, when the Tag Assignments dialog is displayed, it appears as  
follows:  
Clicking Install Danger Tag checks our security level, and if we have sufficient  
access, displays a Danger Tag for the breaker as follows:  
46  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Installed By field on the tag shows the name of the current operator who  
installed the tag; the Installed At field shows the time and date stamp of the tag’s  
installation.  
When we view a wizard which belongs to this group, for example the Large  
Faceplate wizard of one of our ALPS devices, the Danger tag shows up as a red  
indicator with a “D” in it, as shown below:  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Scripting Considerations for the EPM 7700  
This section describes the special InTouch scripting which is required for the EPM  
7700 device’s Large Faceplate, Tabular Data Screen, and Custom Tabular wizards.  
The EPM 7700 is a powerful and highly flexible device, supporting hundreds of  
discrete data items. This scripting is required due to the large number of DDE items  
available for this device type. For performance reasons, not all DDE items are kept  
active simultaneously by the EPM 7700 Tabular Data Screen wizard; at any given  
moment, DDE items which are not used may be disconnected to save the Server the  
additional overhead of monitoring unused items. The scripts described in this section  
automatically configure the DDE links used by the Tabular Data Screen wizard when  
it is displayed, and enable the Large Faceplate wizard to re-connect to items which  
may have been disabled by the Tabular Data Screen wizard.  
NOTE: Failure to install these scripts for the Large Faceplate and Tabular Data  
Screen wizards may result in faulty behavior of the wizard!  
Templates for the required scripts are automatically installed in the InTouch directory  
when PMCS is installed with the EPM 7700 Software Components option selected.  
You may use the Notepad accessory program to open the files, then copy the text  
from the file to InTouch when appropriate.  
There are three scripts described in this section. The first script is an InTouch  
Application Script that is required whenever a Large Faceplate or Tabular Data  
Screen wizard is installed for a given device. The purpose of this script is to provide  
communication status indication on the wizard. If the application script is not  
installed, the “Communications Failed” indicator on the Large Faceplate and Tabular  
Data wizards will not function. The second script, the EPM 7700 Large  
Faceplate/Custom Table Script, is an InTouch Window Script that must be applied to  
each Large Faceplate and Custom Tabular wizard window. This script ensures that  
any tags which were disabled by the Tabular Data wizard are properly restored when  
switching to a Large Faceplate or Custom Table screen. The third script, the Tabular  
Data Screen Script, also an InTouch Window Script, applies only to the EPM 7700  
Tabular Data Screen wizard. Its purpose is to automatically initialize the wizard for  
optimum performance whenever its window is displayed.  
Note that the application script is required whenever a Large Faceplate or Tabular  
wizard is installed. The Windows scripts are required whenever your application uses  
Tabular Data wizards.  
48  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Application Script  
1. After configuring the EPM 7700 Large Faceplate wizard or Tabular Data Screen  
wizard, select “Special  
\
Scripts  
\
Application Scripts…” from the  
WindowMaker main menu. The Application Script Dialog box opens:  
2. Select “While Running” from the Condition Type drop down list, and enter  
“30000” in the “Every … Msec” text box next to the Condition Type drop down  
list.  
3. Use Notepad.exe to open the file “EPM7700 Application Script.txt”, located in  
the Intouch directory of the PC. Select (highlight) all the file text and copy it to  
the clipboard using the CTRL-C keyboard command.  
4. Switch back to WindowMaker and paste the clipboard contents into the  
Application Script dialog text box, using the CTRL-V keyboard command.  
5. From the dialog box menu, select Edit \ Find… to bring up the Replace dialog  
box as shown in the example below. In the “Find What” field, type in  
“DeviceNm”. In the “Replace With” field type in the Device Name used to  
configure the Large Faceplate wizard. Click the “Replace All” button to modify  
the text, then click the Cancel button to close the Replace dialog.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Click the OK button to close the Application Script Dialog.  
NOTE: The application script text is only needed once for each configured device. If  
you are installing more than one wizard for a particular EPM7700 device (for  
example, a Large Faceplate and a Tabular Wizard), you only need to copy the  
application script once. If you are installing more than one EPM7700 device in your  
InTouch application, the application script window must contain a copy of the  
application script text for each configured device. See the example below:  
50  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPM 7700 Large Faceplate or Custom Table Wizard Scripting  
Configuring the Large Faceplate/Custom Table Script  
1. After configuring the Large Faceplate or Custom Table wizard, and with its  
window displayed, select “Special \ Scripts \ Window Scripts… from the  
WindowMaker main menu. The Window Script Dialog box opens:  
2. Select "On Show" from the Condition Type drop down list.  
3. Use Notepad.exe to open the file “EPM7700 Non-Tabular Window Script.txt”,  
located in the Intouch directory of the PC.  
4. Select (highlight) all the file text and copy it to the clipboard using the CTRL-C  
keyboard command.  
5. Switch to WindowMaker and paste the clipboard contents into the Window  
Script dialog text box, using the CTRL-V keyboard command.  
6. From the dialog box menu, select Edit \ Find… to bring up the Replace dialog  
box as shown in the following example. In the “Find What” field, type in  
“DeviceNm”. In the “Replace With” field, enter the Device Name used to  
configure the Large Faceplate wizard. Click the “Replace All” button to modify  
the text. Click the Cancel button to close the Replace dialog. Click the OK  
button to close the Window Scripts Dialog.  
52  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPM 7700 Tabular Data Screen Scripting  
All EPM7700 Tabular wizards require the creation of a Window Script in InTouch.  
The Window Script automatically configures DDE Links used by the Tabular Wizard  
when it is displayed. The script must first be configured, then installed, per the  
following procedures.  
Configuring the Tabular Data Screen Script  
1. After configuring the Tabular wizard, and with its window displayed, select  
"Special \ Scripts \ Window Scripts… from the WindowMaker main menu. The  
Window Script Dialog box opens.  
2. Select “On Show” from the Condition Type drop down list.  
3. Use the Notepad.exe accessory program to open the file “EPM7700 Tabular  
Window Script.txt”, located in the Intouch directory of the PC. Select (highlight)  
all the file text and copy it to the clipboard using the CTRL-C keyboard  
command.  
4. Switch back to WindowMaker and paste the clipboard contents into the Window  
Script dialog text box, using the CTRL-V keyboard command.  
5. From the dialog box menu, select Edit \ Find… to bring up the Replace dialog  
box, as shown in the example below. In the “Find What” field, type in  
“DeviceNm”. In the “Replace With” field type in the Device Name used to  
configure the Tabular wizard. Click the “Replace All” button to modify the text.  
Click the Cancel button to close the Replace dialog. Click the OK button to close  
the Window Scripts Dialog.  
54  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating Floor Plans, Elevation  
Views, and One-Line Diagrams  
Introduction  
This chapter illustrates how to use the GE wizards described in Chapter 2 to create  
animated displays of the facility floor plan, switchgear elevations, and system one-  
line diagrams. These examples are typical, but are not intended to display the limits  
of creative system design.  
Elevation Views  
Elevation views of switchgear and switchboards are typically created first, because  
miniature bitmaps of the elevations can be conveniently placed in floor plans as  
navigation items.  
To build an elevation view, place GE Elevation and Small Faceplate wizards into the  
window, as follows:  
1. Place the appropriate cabinet.  
2. Place panels onto the cabinet.  
3. Add nameplates, louvers, handles, and fasteners to create the desired  
level of detail.  
4. Place GE Small Faceplate wizards representing the components  
installed in the equipment on top of the elevation wizards, as shown in  
the figure on the following page.  
5. Configure each of the Small Faceplate wizards to open a window  
containing an appropriate Large Faceplate or Tabular Data Screen for  
the device.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. You can add additional navigation buttons (using standard InTouch  
controls) to open windows containing one-line views or other  
information.  
7. If the switchgear shown in the elevation view is fed from or feeds  
another lineup, you can add buttons to navigate to elevation views  
representing those lineups.  
56  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Floor Plans  
A floor plan should be a recognizable overhead representation of a facility. These  
windows are built using the GE Floor Plan wizards, described in Chapter 2. They can  
be made as detailed or as simple as desired. The example below shows an overview  
of a facility, showing all of the areas containing equipment.  
You can link each of these areas in the main window to a more detailed window by  
adding a labeled navigation button (using standard InTouch controls) that is  
configured to show that window. In this way, you can provide paths to move up and  
down through a complete floor plan hierarchy.  
Floor plans may be as detailed as you desire and may include miniature bitmaps of  
equipment elevations. The procedure for creating a miniature bitmap in a floor plan  
view is as follows:  
1. In the floor plan window, use the toolbox to create a bitmap object with the  
desired size of the miniature switchgear.  
2. Switch to the desired elevation window.  
3. Select and copy the elevation view.  
4. Switch back to the floor plan window.  
5. In the floor plan window, use the Paste Bitmap command to insert the elevation  
view into the bitmap object.  
6. Double-click on the miniature elevation bitmap to configure a link to the full-  
sized elevation view window.  
7. You can add additional buttons, using standard InTouch controls, to navigate to  
windows containing one-line views of the switchgear or other information.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electrical One-Line Diagrams  
One-line diagrams are built by placing and linking circuit elements using the One-  
Line wizards, then creating scripts to provide animation for those wizards whose  
status can be determined or controlled, such as breakers and switches.  
A one-line diagram is drawn by placing GE One-Line wizards into a window. All  
animated One-Line wizards have at least one discrete tag to indicate the status of the  
bus feed to the device, while others may have tags for in and out connections and for  
device status. If you do not require animation, link the wizard’s discrete tags to a  
constant tag with a value of true.  
After the device wizards have been placed and configured, they may be connected by  
standard InTouch line graphics. Double-click on lines to configure them for  
animation. You can link a line to a discrete variable, with the colors set to indicate on  
(typically green) and off (typically red). If several lines are used to indicate one  
section of bus, animate them together with the Make Symbol toolbox selection.  
When a one-line diagram is too large to comfortably fit into a single window, place  
navigation buttons with links to other windows near each bus line that continues to  
another screen. This allows intuitive navigation up and down a distribution system  
hierarchy.  
To accurately animate your one-line diagram once all the graphics are in place,  
condition scripts must be written with the logic for the distribution system. See the  
InTouch documentation for details of the scripting language. The following example  
shows a simple double-ended substation with a tie breaker and the scripting that  
animates it.  
An example of the scripting for this one-line diagram is shown below:  
58  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ Set values of local discrete variables based  
on state of integer status of breaker. This  
section sets the breaker status memory  
discretes to true if the breaker’s analog  
status value is 3 (closed).}  
brk1_s = (brk1 == 3 OR brk1 ==9);  
brk2_s = (brk2 == 3 OR brk1 ==9);  
brk3_s = (brk3 == 3 OR brk1 ==9);  
brk4_s = (brk4 == 3 OR brk1 ==9);  
brk5_s = (brk5 == 3 OR brk1 ==9);  
brk6_s = (brk6 == 3 OR brk1 ==9);  
Sets the breaker status  
memory discretes to  
true if the breaker’s  
analog status value is 3  
(closed).  
{ set the bus status for the incoming feeds to  
the dependent bus above in the  
distribution hierarchy. This section sets the  
dependencies of the bus pieces to other  
sections of the one-line diagram and resets  
pieces of the bus located entirely on this  
screen to false.}  
Sets the  
dependencies of the  
bus pieces to other  
sections of the one-  
line diagram and  
resets the pieces of  
the bus located  
entirely on this screen  
to false.  
bus1 = feed1;  
bus2 = feed2;  
{ set the bus status for the incoming feeds to  
the dependent bus above in the  
distribution hierarchy. This section sets the  
dependencies of the bus pieces to other  
sections of the one-line diagram and resets  
pieces of the bus located entirely on this  
screen to false.}  
bus1 = feed1;  
bus2 = feed2;  
{ reset internal bus pieces to off for  
computations }  
bus3 = 0;  
bus4 = 0;  
bus5 = 0;  
{ set the bus status for the incoming feeds to  
the dependent bus above in the  
distribution hierarchy. This section sets the  
dependencies of the bus pieces to other  
sections of the one-line diagram and resets  
pieces of the bus located entirely on this  
screen to false.}  
IF…THEN statements  
traverse the hierarchy  
from top to bottom,  
left to right, and then  
bottom to top, right to  
left.  
bus1 = feed1;  
bus2 = feed2;  
{ reset internal bus pieces to off for  
computations }  
bus3 = 0;  
bus4 = 0;  
bus5 = 0;  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ set the bus status for the incoming feeds to  
the dependent bus below in the  
distribution hierarchy. The IF_THEN  
statements in this section traverse the  
hierarchy from top to bottom, left to right,  
and then bottom to top, right to left.}  
bus6 = 0;  
bus7 = 0;  
{ two main feeds }  
IF (bus1 AND brk1_s) THEN  
bus3 = 1;  
ENDIF;  
IF (bus2 AND brk2_s) THEN  
bus4 = 1;  
ENDIF;  
{ left to right across tie breaker }  
IF (bus3 AND brk3_s) THEN  
bus4 = 1;  
ENDIF;  
IF (bus4 AND brk4_s) THEN  
bus5 = 1;  
ENDIF;  
{ two outgoing feeders }  
IF (bus3 AND brk5_s) THEN  
bus6 = 1;  
ENDIF;  
IF (bus5 AND brk6_s) THEN  
bus7 = 1;  
ENDIF;  
{ back feed from two outgoing feeds }  
IF (bus7 AND brk6_s) THEN  
bus5 = 1;  
ENDIF;  
IF (bus6 AND brk5_s) THEN  
bus3 = 1;  
ENDIF;  
{ right to left across tie breaker }  
IF (bus5 AND brk4_s) THEN  
bus4 = 1;  
ENDIF;  
IF (bus4 AND brk3_s) THEN  
bus3 = 1;  
ENDIF;  
{ two incoming feeds }  
IF (bus5 AND brk2_s) THEN  
bus2 = 1;  
ENDIF;  
IF (bus3 AND brk1_s) THEN  
bus1 = 1;  
ENDIF;  
60  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sample Application  
Creating a basic interface  
We’ve learned about the various parts and pieces of the Interface Toolkit; now let’s  
put it to work.  
Suppose we have a very basic power management system installed at our corporate  
home office. The system consists of four trip units and a PQM (Power Quality  
Meter). We’d like to set up a computer in the front office to provide a front end to  
this system, allowing us to monitor all these devices at one station without having to  
walk back to the individual devices on the plant floor.  
We plan the application on paper first so that we know how many screens to create  
and what each screen will look like. This will help us save time when in development  
by providing a starting point and a map of what we’re trying to create. This  
‘storyboard’ for our application looks something like this:  
PQM  
PQM  
Faceplate  
Tabular  
Trip Unit 1  
Faceplate  
Trip Unit 1  
Tabular  
Intro  
screen  
Panel  
board  
Trip Unit 2  
Faceplate  
Trip Unit 2  
Tabular  
Trip Unit 3  
Faceplate  
Trip Unit 3  
Tabular  
Trip Unit 4  
Faceplate  
Trip Unit 4  
Tabular  
As shown above, for this basic application, we’ll need 12 screens — an introduction  
screen, a shot of the panelboard showing all five of our power management devices,  
and then a large faceplate and tabular screen for each device. We’ll link the Large  
Faceplate screen for each unit to the Small Faceplate wizard shown on the  
Panelboard screen, and, from the Large Faceplate, we can click on the device’s  
display to jump to the Tabular data screen for that device. To make it easier to  
navigate the screens, we’ll create extra buttons on the bottom of the Faceplate and  
Tabular screens that will jump back to the Panelboard screen.  
With our plan in hand, and after completing the installation procedures described in  
Chapter 1, we’re ready to begin development. Launch InTouch and select the button  
to create a new file, then click the Development button.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
First, we’ll create all our new windows and name them, then we’ll go back and flesh  
them out with their contents and add links between them. Create the following twelve  
windows:  
Main Screen  
Panelboard  
PQM_Face  
PQM_Tab  
Trip1_Face  
Trip1_Tab  
Trip2_Face  
Trip2_Tab  
Trip3_Face  
Trip3_Tab  
Trip4_Face  
Trip4_Tab  
Select the window named Main Screen, and use the Wonderware tools to sketch a  
floorplan of the facility, as shown below.  
In the Manufacturing Floor area, we place a button labeled “Click here to begin…,”  
and give it an animation link to the window named Panelboard.  
Select the Panelboard window. Use the PMCS Elevation wizards to create a mock-up  
of the panelboard, then use the PMCS Small Faceplate wizards to populate the  
panelboard with our PQM meter and the four trip units. The Panelboard screen  
should look like this:  
62  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
We’ll include a note about the panelboard’s location, describing where to find the  
real panel, and also a note of instruction: “Click a device to see the large faceplate  
screen.”  
Create the links to the device screens by double-clicking on each small faceplate and  
entering the name of the device’s Large Faceplate screen. For example, double-click  
on the PQM’s Small Faceplate on the panelboard; then, in the resulting dialog box,  
type the name of the PQM_Face window. Complete these links for the remaining  
devices.  
Next we’ll develop the device screens. For the purposes of this chapter, we’ll just  
walk through the two PQM screens. The development of the trip unit screens follows  
the same procedure.  
Select the PQM_Face window, then use the Wonderware Button tool found on the  
Toolbox to create two new buttons, “HOME” and “Go back to Panel.” Use the  
Animation Links command to tie these buttons to the Main Screen and Panelboard  
windows, respectively. Now use the Wizards tool to place the PQM Large Faceplate  
wizard on the PQM_Face window. The screen should look similar to the following:  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Now we’ll develop the PQM Tabular data screen. Select the PQM Tab window and  
use the Wizards tool to place the PQM Tabular Data wizard on the screen. Double  
click the wizard and fill in the Device Name and the Trending windows as shown  
below. Click OK.  
Finally, add some navigation buttons to the Tabular screen for returning to the Main  
Screen (HOME), to the Panelboard (Go to Panel), or to the Large Faceplate screen  
(Go back to Faceplate). Link each button to the appropriate screen, and you’re all set!  
64  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Complete the application by developing the Faceplate and Tabular screens for each  
of the four trip units and that’s it — we’ve just developed a PMCS application using  
the GE Wonderware Wizards.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(This page left blank intentionally)  
66  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features of GE Large Faceplate  
Wizards  
About the Large Faceplate Wizards  
This chapter contains descriptions of the functions available with each of the GE  
Large Faceplate wizards. While a majority of the most popular data available at each  
device have been made available in the Wizards, some functions available with the  
actual devices are not provided in the Large Faceplate representations, such as the  
following:  
Test Mode or Simulation Mode on some devices is not fully supported  
Details on status/alarm/trips other than the information displayed by the  
front LEDs and a brief text message (see Tabular Data Screens for  
detailed status/alarm/trip information)  
Any flashing status messages which may be produced by a device  
Some actual values are not displayed on the Large Faceplate Wizard,  
but can be found on Tabular Data Screen Wizards  
Users should be aware that not all values displayed by the GE Large Faceplate  
Wizards are automatically updated. Also, some rapidly changing values, especially  
those requiring calculation, cannot be displayed as rapidly on the wizard as on the  
actual device’s screen.  
For a more detailed description of the functions of a device, see the user’s guide for  
that device.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
POWER LEADER EPM  
The large faceplate representation of the POWER LEADER EPM provides the  
following animated functions:  
Click on...  
Function  
Display Window  
Clicking on the display area opens the tabular data window  
specified during wizard configuration and sets the view to  
the Normal Metering page.  
GE Logo  
Clicking the GE logo opens the tabular data window  
specified during wizard configuration and sets the view to  
the Setup page.  
SELECT/ENTER  
Button  
Toggles the display between the normal and alternate lists  
of metering parameters.  
SCROLL Buttons  
Loop through all metered parameters for the current mode,  
displaying two values at a time. The down arrow scrolls  
down through the parameter list, with the new value  
appearing on the lower line of the display. The up arrow  
scrolls up through the parameter list with the new value  
appearing on the display’s upper line. Depending on  
whether the EPM has been configured as a Delta or Wye  
device, certain parameters display either line-to-line or  
line-to-neutral values.  
Table 1. PLEPM Faceplate animated functions.  
The electrical parameters and status information displayed by the EPM are listed  
below for both the normal and alternate scrolls. Note that the displayed parameters  
68  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
differ depending on whether the EPM is configured as Wye or Delta. Please note that  
the Normal Scroll Delta and Alternate Scroll Delta lists contain several parameters  
marked with an asterisk; these parameters were included in the wizard for  
programming reasons, but are not valid for Delta configurations and should not be  
used.  
Normal Scroll, Wye  
Normal Scroll, Delta  
Current, Phase A  
Current, RMS Phase A  
Current, RMS Phase B  
Current, RMS Phase C  
Current, RMS Neutral  
Voltage, RMS Phase A–N  
Voltage, RMS Phase B–N  
Voltage, RMS Phase C–N  
Voltage, RMS Phase A–B  
Voltage, RMS Phase B–C  
Voltage, RMS Phase C–A  
Watts, Phase A  
Current, Phase B  
Current, Phase C  
Current, RMS Neutral *  
Voltage, RMS Phase A–N *  
Voltage, RMS Phase B–N *  
Voltage, RMS Phase C–N *  
Voltage, RMS Phase A–B  
Voltage, RMS Phase B–C  
Voltage, RMS Phase C–A  
Watts, Phase A–B  
Watts, Phase B  
Watts, Phase B–C  
Watts, Phase C  
Watts, Total  
Watts, Total  
Watts, Demand  
Watts, Demand  
Watts, Peak Demand  
Vars, Phase A–B  
Watts, Peak Demand  
Vars, Phase A  
Vars, Phase B–C  
Vars, Phase B  
Vars, Total  
Vars, Phase C  
Volt-amperes, Phase A–B  
Volt-amperes, Phase B–C  
Volt-amperes, Total  
Power Factor, Total  
Watthours, Total  
Vars, Total  
Volt-amperes, Phase A  
Volt-amperes, Phase B  
Volt-amperes, Phase C  
Volt-amperes, Total  
Power Factor, Total  
Watthours, Total  
Varhours, Total Lag (+)  
Varhours, Total Lead (–)  
Volt-ampere-hours, Total  
Frequency, in hertz  
Varhours, Total Lag (+)  
Varhours, Total Lead (–)  
Volt-ampere-hours, Total  
Frequency, in hertz  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alternate Scroll, Wye  
Current, Phase A Demand  
Current, Phase A Peak Demand  
Current, Phase B Demand  
Current, Phase B Peak Demand  
Current, Phase C Demand  
Current, Phase C Peak Demand  
Watts Demand at Peak VA Demand  
Vars, Demand Lag (+)  
Alternate Scroll, Delta  
Current, Phase A Demand  
Current, Phase A Peak Demand  
Current, Phase B Demand *  
Current, Phase B Peak Demand *  
Current, Phase C Demand  
Current, Phase C Peak Demand  
Watts Demand at Peak VA Demand  
Vars, Demand Lag (+)  
Vars, Demand Lead (–)  
Vars, Demand Lead (–)  
Vars, Peak Demand Lag (+)  
Vars, Peak Demand Lead (–)  
Volt-amperes, Demand  
Vars, Peak Demand Lag (+)  
Vars, Peak Demand Lead (–)  
Volt-amperes, Demand  
Volt-amperes, Peak Demand  
Q-hours, Total  
Volt-amperes, Peak Demand  
Q-hours, Total  
Power Factor, Phase A  
Power Factor, Phase A–B  
Power Factor, Phase B–C  
Power Factor, Average Since Reset  
Power Factor, Demand Average  
Power Factor at Peak VA Demand  
Number of Demand Resets  
Time Left in Demand Subinterval  
Number of Power Outages  
Potential Transformer Ratio  
Current Transformer Ratio  
Power Factor, Phase B  
Power Factor, Phase C  
Power Factor, Average Since Reset  
Power Factor, Demand Average  
Power Factor at Peak VA Demand  
Number of Demand Resets  
Time Left in Demand Subinterval  
Number of Power Outages  
Potential Transformer Ratio  
Current Transformer Ratio  
70  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spectra MicroVersaTrip Trip Unit  
The large faceplate representation of the Spectra MicroVersaTrip trip unit provides  
the following animated functions:  
Click on...  
Function  
Display  
Window  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Normal Monitoring  
page.  
FUNCTION  
Button  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
ENTER Button  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
VALUE Button  
Changes phases in appropriate modes, depending on  
whether the device has been configured as Wye or Delta  
Phase is indicated by letters in the upper right of the  
display; press VALUE to display a different phase.  
SELECT  
Button  
Rotates among six different modes, as shown in the lower  
left of the display, with units in the lower right.  
Table 2. Spectra MVT Faceplate animated functions.  
The metering modes available with the SELECT button are as follows:  
Mode  
Description  
AMPS  
Current, with no label in the units area of the display. Phase shifting in both  
Delta and Wye configurations.  
VOLTS  
Voltage, displayed as line-to-line (VL-L) for Delta and line-to-neutral (VL-N)  
for Wye. Phase shifting in both configurations.  
ENGY  
PWR  
Energy, displayed in kWh; no phase shifting.  
Real power indicated by non-blinking units symbol (kW). Apparent power  
indicated by blinking units symbol. Phase shifting in Wye configuration.  
FREQ  
Frequency, displayed in Hz. Phase shifting in both Delta and Wye  
configurations.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enhanced MicroVersaTrip-C Trip Unit  
The large faceplate representation of the Enhanced MicroVersaTrip-C trip unit  
provides the following animated functions:  
Click on ...  
Function  
Display  
Window  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Monitoring page.  
FUNCTION  
Button  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
ENTER Button  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
BATTERY  
Button  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
VALUE Button  
Changes phases in appropriate modes, depending on  
whether the device has been configured as Wye or Delta,  
Phase is indicated by numbers in the upper right of the  
display; press VALUE to display a different phase.  
SELECT  
Button  
Rotates among eight different modes, as shown in the lower  
left of the display, with units in the lower right.  
Table 3. EMVT-C Faceplate animated functions.  
72  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The EMVT-C’s metering modes available with the SELECT button are as follows:  
Mode  
Description  
AMPS  
Current, with no label in the units area of the display. Phase shifting  
in both Delta and Wye configurations.  
VOLTS  
Voltage, displayed as line-to-line (Ph-Ph) for Delta and line-to-  
neutral (Ph-N) for Wye. Phases shown as 01, 02, or 03 for Wye and  
01 02, 01 03, or 02 03 for Delta.  
kWh  
Energy; no phase shifting.  
kW  
Real power; no phase shifting.  
Apparent power; no phase shifting.  
kVA  
Demand  
Power demand, displayed with steady kW symbol. Peak power  
demand, displayed with blinking kW symbol. No phase shifting.  
FREQ  
Frequency, displayed in Hz. Phase shifting in both Delta and Wye  
configurations.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enhanced MicroVersaTrip-D Trip Unit  
The large faceplate representation of the Enhanced MicroVersaTrip-D trip unit  
provides the following animated functions:  
Feature  
Function  
Display  
Window  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Monitoring page.  
FUNCTION  
Button  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
ENTER Button  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
BATTERY  
Button  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
VALUE Button  
Changes phases in appropriate modes, depending on whether  
the device has been configured as Wye or Delta Phase is  
indicated by numbers in the upper right of the display; press  
VALUE to display a different phase.  
SELECT  
Button  
Rotates among eight different modes, as shown in the lower  
left of the display, with units in the lower right.  
Table 4. EMVT-D Faceplate animated functions.  
74  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The metering modes available with the SELECT button are as follows:  
Mode  
Description  
AMPS  
Current, with no label in the units area of the display. Phase  
shifting in both Delta and Wye configurations.  
VOLTS  
Voltage, displayed as line-to-line (Ph-Ph) for Delta and line-to-  
neutral (Ph-N) for Wye. Phases shown as 01, 02, or 03 for Wye  
and 01 02, 01 03, or 02 03 for delta.  
kWh  
Energy; no phase shifting.  
kW  
Real power; no phase shifting.  
Apparent power; no phase shifting.  
kVA  
Demand  
Power demand, displayed with steady kW symbol. Peak power  
demand, displayed with blinking kW symbol. No phase shifting.  
FREQ  
Frequency, displayed in Hz. Phase shifting in both Delta and  
Wye configurations.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
POWER LEADER Meter  
The large faceplate representation of the POWER LEADER Meter provides the  
following animated functions:  
Feature  
Function  
Display Window  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Monitoring page.  
GE Logo  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
RESET/ENTER  
Button  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
PHASE Button  
Rotates among phase readings for appropriate modes, indicated  
by the phase LEDs below the display window.  
SCROLL UP  
and SCROLL  
DOWN Buttons  
Loop through display modes either down or up the list of  
parameters. Fourteen modes available with a Delta-configured  
device; one additional with Wye.  
Table 5. PL Meter Faceplate animated functions.  
76  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The parameters available with the SCROLL buttons are listed below:  
Mode  
Description  
RMS Current  
RMS Voltage L-N  
Units in Amps; phase shifting among A, B, and C.  
Units in Volts; available only in Wye configuration, with phase shifting  
among A, B, and C.  
RMS Voltage L-L  
Watts  
Units in Volts; phase shifting among AB, BC, and CA.  
Units in kW; phase shifting among A, B, C, and total.  
Units in kVARs; phase shifting among A, B, C, and total.  
Units in kVA; phase shifting among A, B, C, and total.  
No units; no phase shifting.  
Vars  
Volt-Amps  
Power Factor  
Watt-Hours  
VAR-Hours  
Current Demand  
Peak Current  
Watt Demand  
Peak Watt Demand  
Frequency  
Units in kWH; no phase shifting.  
Units in kVARH; no phase shifting.  
Units in A; phase shifting among A, B, and C.  
Units in A; phase shifting among A, B, and C.  
Units in kW; no phase shifting.  
Units in kW; no phase shifting.  
Units in Hz; no phase shifting.  
Harm Distortion  
Value area of display is blank; degree of harmonic distortion is shown as  
negligible, mild, moderate, or severe.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spectra ECM  
The large faceplate representation of the Spectra ECM provides the following  
animated functions:  
Feature  
Function  
Display Window  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Monitoring page.  
CONTRAST  
Buttons  
Open the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
Refresh Button  
Updates the display to the most current readings.  
SCROLL  
Buttons  
Loop through all selections for each of the valid modes  
accessed by the SELECT/EXIT button.  
SELECT/EXIT  
Button  
Displays the top-line message “Press SELECT for”. Press  
one of the SCROLL buttons to rotate among the four  
modes. Press SELECT/EXIT to display the first value of  
the current mode and the SCROLL buttons for all other  
values available in that mode. Press again to redisplay the  
“Press SELECT for” prompt for mode selection.  
Table 6. Spectra ECM Faceplate animated functions.  
The modes and the parameters available in each mode are as follows:  
78  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mode  
Parameters and Units  
STATUS  
Motor Status  
ECM Status  
Trip Status  
SETPOINTS  
METERING  
FLA Setting, amps  
Rating Plug, amps  
Phase Unbalance, disabled/enabled  
Ground Fault, disabled/enabled  
Commnet Address  
Phase A Current, amps  
Phase B Current, amps  
Phase C Current, amps  
Average Current, amps  
Phase Unbalance, percent  
Ground Current, amps  
Motor Load, percent  
LAST TRIP INFO  
Last Trip Cause  
Phase A @ Trip, amps  
Phase B @ Trip, amps  
Phase C @ Trip, amps  
Unbalance @ Trip, percent  
Ground Current @ Trip, amps  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPM 3710 Meter  
The large faceplate representation of the EPM 3710 provides the following animated  
functions:  
Feature  
Function  
Display  
Window  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Monitoring page.  
MIN/MAX  
Buttons  
Open the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and set the view to the Setup page.  
PHASE  
Button  
Rotates the left side of the display through eight sets of  
instantaneous values, as described in the table below.  
FUNCTION  
Button  
Rotates the right side of the display through 13  
accumulated values.  
Table 7. EPM 3710 Faceplate animated functions.  
The parameters displayed by the PHASE button are listed in the following table.  
Display Indication  
Parameters  
A
B
Phase A current and line-to-neutral voltage  
Phase B current and line-to-neutral voltage  
Phase C current and line-to-neutral voltage  
Average current and line-to-neutral voltage  
Phase A current and A-B line-to-line voltage  
Phase B current and B-C line-to-line voltage  
Phase C current and C-A line-to-line voltage  
Average current line-to-line voltage  
C
*
A,  
B,  
C,  
*,  
The parameters displayed by the FUNCTION button are listed in the following table.  
If any of the import or export values are zero, they are not displayed and the next  
nonzero value is shown. When any of these parameters are displayed, the AMPS  
portion of the display window is used to allow display of the complete value.  
80  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Indication  
Parameter  
kW  
Total real power  
kVA  
Total apparent power  
Total reactive power  
Power factor; lagging or leading  
Frequency  
kQ  
PFLG or PFLD  
Hz  
kWD  
Kilowatt total demand  
Current average demand or apparent power demand  
RMS auxiliary voltage  
RMS neutral current  
Import energy  
A or kVA  
VX  
I4  
kWH-F  
kWH-R  
kVARH-F  
kVARH-R  
Export energy  
Import reactive energy  
Export reactive energy  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPM 3720 Meter  
The large faceplate representation of the EPM 3720 meter provides the following  
animated functions:  
Feature  
Function  
Display Window  
GROUP Buttons  
PHASE Button  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Monitoring page.  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
Rotates the left side of the display through eight sets of  
instantaneous values, as described in the table below. May  
also affect the POWER FUNCTIONS portion of the  
display, depending on the FUNCTION selection.  
FUNCTION  
Button  
Rotates the right side of the display through 24  
accumulated values, in conjunction with the PHASE  
button.  
Table 8. EPM 3720 Faceplate animated functions.  
The parameters displayed by the PHASE button are listed in the following table.  
Display Indication  
Parameters  
A
B
C
*
Phase A current and line-to-neutral voltage  
Phase B current and line-to-neutral voltage  
Phase C current and line-to-neutral voltage  
Average current and line-to-neutral voltage  
Phase A current and A-B line-to-line voltage  
A,  
82  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Indication  
Parameters  
B,  
C,  
*,  
Phase B current and B-C line-to-line voltage  
Phase C current and C-A line-to-line voltage  
Average current line-to-line voltage  
The parameters displayed by the FUNCTION button are listed in the following table.  
When any of the import, export, or net parameters are displayed, the AMPS portion  
of the display window is used to allow display of the complete value.  
Display  
Parameter  
Indication  
kW  
Real power for phase A, B, or C as set by PHASE button, or  
total real power if PHASE is set to * or *,.  
kVR  
Reactive power for phase A, B, or C as set by PHASE button, or  
total reactive power if PHASE is set to * or *,.  
kVA  
Apparent power for phase A, B, or C as set by PHASE button,  
or total apparent power if PHASE is set to * or *,.  
PFLG or PFLD  
Power factor, lagging or leading, for phase !A, B, or C as set by  
PHASE button, or total power factor if PHASE is set to * or *,.  
I4  
RMS neutral current  
Frequency  
Hz  
VX  
RMS auxiliary voltage  
Import energy  
kWH IM  
kWH EX  
kVARH IM  
kVARH EX  
kVAH NET  
Export energy  
Import reactive energy  
Export reactive energy  
Net reactive energy  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPM 7700 Meter  
The large faceplate representation of the EPM 7700 meter provides the following  
animated functions:  
Feature  
Function  
LCD display  
window  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Metering page.  
ESC  
Opens the displays the main menu on the faceplate as  
shown above.  
Blank Buttons  
Pressing the keys adjacent to the LCD Display window  
displays the selected screen. For instance, selecting the  
Total Power button displays the Total Power screen of  
data.  
Table 9. EPM 7700 Faceplate animated functions.  
The parameters displayed by the various data screen buttons are listed in the  
following table.  
84  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Screen Selected  
Description  
1 - Total Power  
KW Total  
KVAR Total  
KVA Total  
PF Signed Total  
Vln a; Vln b: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
Vln c: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
Vln Avg: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
Vll ab  
Vll bc; Vll ca; Vll avg: n/a when Voltage Mode is SINGLE  
Ia, Ib, I4, Iavg  
Ic: n/a when Voltage Mode is SINGLE  
V unbal  
I unbal  
2 - Three-Phase Measurements  
Line Frequency  
3 - Per-Phase Power  
KW a; KW b: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
KW c: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
KW Total  
KVAR a; KVAR b: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
KVAR c: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
KVAR Total  
KVA a; KVA b: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
KVA c: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
KVA Total  
PF Signed a; PF Signed b: n/a when Voltage Mode is  
DELTA  
PF Signed c: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or  
SINGLE  
4 - Energy  
KWh Import; KWh Export; KWh Total; KWh Net  
KVARh Import; KVARh Export; KVARh Total; KVARh  
Net  
KVAh Total  
KW Total Min; KVAR Total Min; KVA Total Min  
KW Total Max; KVAR Total Max; KVA Total Max  
5 - Symmetrical Components  
6 - Digital Inputs  
I ZeroSeqMag; I PosSeqMag; I NegSeqMag  
V ZeroSeqMag; V PosSeqMag; V NegSeqMag  
I ZeroSeqPhs; I PosSeqPhs; I NegSeqPhs  
V ZeroSeqPhs; V PosSeqPhs; V NegSeqPhs  
Status Inputs 1 - 8  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Screen Selected  
Description  
7 - Per-Phase Minimums  
Vln a Min; Vln b Min: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
Vln c Min: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
Vln Avg Min: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
Vll ab Min  
Vll bc Min; Vll ca Min; Vll Avg Min: n/a when Voltage  
Mode is SINGLE  
Ia Min; Ib Min  
Ic Min: n/a when Voltage Mode is SINGLE  
I Avg Min  
8 - Per-Phase Maximums  
Vln a Max; Vln b Max : n/a when Voltage Mode is  
DELTA  
Vln c Max: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
Vln Avg Max: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
Vll ab Max  
Vll bc Max; Vll ca Max; Vll Avg Max: n/a when Voltage  
Mode is SINGLE  
Ia Max; Ib Max  
Ic Max: n/a when Voltage Mode is SINGLE  
I Avg Max  
9 - Power & Amp Demand  
10 - THD and K-Factor  
KW SWD; KVAR SWD; KVA SWD**  
KW PD; KVAR PD; KVA PD**  
KW Total; KVAR Total; KVA Total  
V1 THD; V2 THD; V3 THD: n/a when Source is n/a  
I1 THD; I2 THD; I3 THD; I4 THD: n/a when Source is n/a  
I1 K Factor; I2 K Factor; I3 K Factor; I4 K Factor: n/a  
when Source is n/a  
**NOTE: If the Sliding Demand Reset is initiated, or a SWD setup register is  
changed, SWD values are “N/A” in the meter until the number of sub-intervals  
specified in the #sub intervals setup register have expired. The 3D faceplate and  
Tabular wizard will display 0 for these values during this state.  
86  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
269 Plus Motor Management Relay  
The large faceplate representation of the 269 Plus provides the following animated  
functions:  
Feature  
Function  
Display Window  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Monitoring page.  
SET POINTS  
Button  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
RESET Button  
CLEAR Button  
VALUE Buttons  
HELP Button  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
Open the tabular data window specified during wizard  
configuration and set the view to the Setup page.  
Displays a Windows help screen for PMCS.  
ACTUAL  
VALUES Button  
Brings the meter to an initial setting point and displays ACTUAL  
VALUES HAS SEVEN PAGES OF DATA.  
REFRESH  
Button  
Updates the display to the current meter reading.  
STORE Button  
Resets the meter at two special points in the display of values.  
Press STORE to toggle the response on the bottom line.  
PAGE Buttons  
Rotate among seven pages of parameter data. Press one of the  
arrow keys to display PAGE #: ACTUAL VALUES on the top  
line, a description on the bottom, and reset to the first parameter  
value. The seven pages are listed in the table below.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature  
Function  
LINE Buttons  
Rotate among parameters within a page. Certain configurations  
or meter values may prevent display of all parameters within a  
page. The parameters in each page are listed in the table below.  
Panel Display  
Lights  
Display animation that shows the status of the 269 Plus relay. If  
a trip or alarm has occurred, auxiliary relay 1 or 2 is active. If the  
meter fails its self-test, the dark red square to the left of the label  
appears bright red.  
Table 10. 269+ Faceplate animated functions.  
The following table lists the pages that can be accessed with the PAGE buttons, with  
the parameters available in each page that can be accessed with the LINE buttons.  
Page  
Value  
Text Displayed  
Description  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
PAGE 1: ACTUAL VALUES  
PHASE CURRENT DATA  
Page header  
I1=xxx  
I3=xxx  
I2=xxx  
(AMPS)---  
Phase current in amps; --- or RUN based on  
motor status  
I(3 Ph avg.)=xxx AMPS  
Max Stator RTD=xxx  
Average phase current  
Hottest stator temperature  
C
1
UNBALANCE RATIO (In/Ip)  
U/B=xx PERCENT  
GROUND FAULT CURRENT  
G/F=xxx.0 AMPS  
Units = *.1 if G/F CT  
ratio = 2000:1  
ST/HR TIMERS (MIN)  
xx xx xx xx xx  
Starts per hour  
TIME  
BETWEEN STARTS  
TIMER = xxx  
MIN  
8
END OF PAGE ONE  
ACTUAL VALUES  
Page footer  
Page header  
1
PAGE 2: ACTUAL VALUES  
RTD TEMPERATURE DATA  
2
HOTTEST STATOR RTD  
RTD #xx = xxx  
3-12  
13  
14-17  
18  
19  
RTD TEMPERATURE  
RTD # xx = xxx  
Displays temperatures of RTDs #1-10  
Displays #7-10 max  
2
MAX STATOR SINCE LAST  
ACCESS: RTD #x = xxx DEGREES C  
MAXIMUM RTD #x TEMP SINCE  
LAST ACCESS: xxx DEGREES C  
CLEAR LAST ACCESS DATA?  
NO  
Press STORE to clear; message changes to  
YES  
END OF PAGE TWO  
ACTUAL VALUES  
Page footer  
88  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page  
Value  
Text Displayed  
Description  
1
PAGE 3: ACTUAL VALUES  
MOTOR CAPACITY DATA  
Page header  
2
ESTIMATED TIME TO  
TRIP = xxx SECONDS  
3
3
MOTOR LOAD AS A PERCENT  
FULL LOAD = xxx PERCENT  
4
THERMAL CAPACITY  
USED = xxx PERCENT  
5
END OF PAGE THREE:  
ACTUAL VALUES  
Page footer  
Page header  
1
PAGE 4: ACTUAL VALUES  
STATISTICAL DATA  
2
RUNNING HOURS SINCE LAST  
COMMISSIONING xxx HOURS  
3
MEGAWATTHOURS SINCE LAST  
COMMISSIONING xxx MWHR  
Displayed only if MTM unit is installed in 269  
4
# OF STARTS SINCE LAST  
COMMISSIONING xxx  
5
# OF TRIPS SINCE LAST  
COMMISSIONING xxx  
6
# O/L TRIPS SINCE LAST  
COMMISSIONING xxx  
Overload trips  
7
# RAPID TRIPS SINCE LAST  
COMMISSIONING xxx  
8
# U/B TRIPS SINCE LAST  
COMMISSIONING xxx  
Unbalance trips  
4
9
# G/F TRIPS SINCE LAST  
COMMISSIONING xxx  
Ground-fault trips  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
# RTD TRIPS SINCE LAST  
COMMISSIONING xxx  
# S/C TRIPS SINCE LAST  
COMMISSIONING xxx  
Short-circuit trips  
# START TRIPS SINCE LAST  
COMMISSIONING xxx  
# U/V TRIPS SINCE LAST  
COMMISSIONING xxx  
Undervoltage trips  
Overvoltage trips  
Power-failure trips  
# O/V TRIPS SINCE LAST  
COMMISSIONING xxx  
# PF TRIPS SINCE LAST  
COMMISSIONING xxx  
VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSALS  
SINCE COMMISSIONING xxx  
START NEW COMMISSIONING  
NO  
Press STORE to start; message changes to  
YES  
4
END OF PAGE FOUR:  
ACTUAL VALUES  
Page footer  
1
PAGE 5: ACTUAL VALUES  
PRE-TRIP DATA  
Page header  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page  
Value  
Text Displayed  
Description  
2
CAUSE OF LAST TRIP  
message  
Message is a brief explanation of trip cause  
3
PRE-TRIP AVERAGE MOTOR  
CURRENT = xxx AMPS  
4
PRE-TRIP U/B RATIO  
(lI/Ip) xxx PERCENT  
Unbalance  
5
PRE-TRIP G/F CURRENT  
G/F=xxx.0 AMPS  
Units = *.1 if G/F CT  
ratio = 2000:1  
5
6
PRE-TRIP MAX STATOR RTD  
RTD #XX = xxx  
C
7
PRE-TRIP AVERAGE VOLTAGE  
VOLTS = xxx  
Displayed only if MTM unit is installed in 269  
Displayed only if MTM unit is installed in 269  
Displayed only if MTM unit is installed in 269  
Displayed only if MTM unit is installed in 269  
Displayed only if MTM unit is installed in 269  
Page footer  
8
PRE-TRIP KWATTS  
KW = xxx  
9
PRE-TRIP KVARS  
KVAR = xxx  
10  
11  
12  
1
PRE-TRIP POWER FACTOR  
PF = xxx  
PRE-TRIP FREQUENCY  
HZ = xxx  
END OF PAGE FIVE  
ACTUAL VALUES  
PAGE 6: ACTUAL VALUES  
LEARNED PARAMETERS  
Page header  
2
LEARNED Istart (AVG OF 4  
STARTS)=xxx AMPS  
3
LEARNED Istart (last one)  
=xxx  
LEARNED K FACTOR  
K = xxx AMPS  
AMPS  
4
6
5
LEARNED RUNNING COOL  
TIME-xxx MIN  
6
LEARNED STOPPED COOL  
TIME = xxx MIN  
7
LEARNED ACCEL TIME  
ACCEL TIME = xxx SEC  
8
LEARNED Start Capacity  
Required = xxx  
PERCENT  
9
END OF PAGE SIX  
ACTUAL VALUES  
Page footer  
1
PAGE 7: ACTUAL VALUES  
METERING DATA  
Page header  
2
Vab = xxx  
Vac = xxx  
Vbc = xxx  
(VOLTS)  
Displayed only if MTM unit is on line  
or  
MTM METER MODULE  
NOT INSTALLED  
3
3 PHASE KWATTS  
KW = xxx  
Displayed only if MTM unit is on line  
90  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page  
Value  
Text Displayed  
Description  
7
4
3 PHASE KVARS  
KVAR = xxx  
Displayed only if MTM unit is on line  
5
6
7
POWER FACTOR  
PF = xxx  
Displayed only if MTM unit is on line  
Displayed only if MTM unit is on line  
Page footer  
FREQUENCY  
HZ = xx.x  
END OF PAGE SEVEN  
ACTUAL VALUES  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
565 Feeder Management Relay  
The large faceplate representation of the 565 provides the following animated  
functions:  
Feature  
Function  
Display Window  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard configuration and sets the view to Monitoring page.  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
SET POINTS  
Button  
RESET Button  
CLEAR Button  
NEXT CHOICE  
0 to 9 Buttons  
HELP Button  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
Opens the tabular data window specified during wizard configuration and sets the view to the Setup page.  
Open the tabular data window specified during wizard configuration and set the view to the Setup page.  
Displays a Windows help screen for PMCS.  
ACTUAL  
Brings the meter to an initial setting point and displays ACTUAL VALUES HAS NINE PAGES OF DATA.  
VALUES Button  
REFRESH Button  
STORE Button  
Updates the display to the current meter reading.  
Resets the meter at six special points in the display of values. Press STORE to toggle the response on the  
bottom line.  
PAGE UP Button  
LINE Buttons  
Rotates among nine pages of parameter data. Press the key to display ACTUAL VALUES on the top line, a  
description on the bottom, and reset to the first parameter value. The nine pages are listed in the table below.  
Rotate among parameters within a page. Certain configurations or meter values may prevent display of all  
parameters within a page. The parameters in each page are listed in the table below.  
Panel Display  
Lights  
Display animation that shows the status of the 565 relay. The dark red square to the left of the label appears  
bright red to indicate an active state. The TRIP bar shows the current trip condition. Auxiliary relays 1, 2, and  
3 show user-selected function status. The BREAKER CLOSED and BREAKER OPEN bars show the status  
of the monitored feeder breaker. The SERVICE bar is not animated.  
Table 11. 565 Faceplate animated functions.  
The following table lists the pages that can be accessed with the PAGE UP button,  
with the parameters available in each page that can be accessed with the LINE buttons.  
92  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page  
Value  
Text Displayed  
Description  
1
ACTUAL VALUES  
CURRENT  
Page header  
2
3
4
5
6
PHASE A CURRENT  
xxx  
Value in amps  
Value in amps  
Value in amps  
Value in amps  
Value in amps  
PHASE B CURRENT  
xxx  
1
PHASE C CURRENT  
xxx  
GROUND CURRENT  
xxx  
PHASES A = xxx  
B = xxx C = xxx  
or  
Breaker is closed and current <1% of trip  
level in all phases  
PHASES A<1% FS  
B<1% FS C<1% FS  
7
1
2
CURRENT  
END OF PAGE  
Page footer  
Page header  
ACTUAL VALUES  
ANALOG INPUT  
2
<analog input name>  
xxx <units>  
Name entered by user, value given in user-  
defined units  
or  
ANALOG INPUT  
DISABLED  
Displayed if disabled  
Page footer  
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
ANALOG INPUT  
END OF PAGE  
ACTUAL VALUES  
MAINTENANCE DATA  
Page header  
BRKR mm/dd/yy  
DATE: xx/xx/xx  
BREAKER TRIPS  
xxx  
Number of trips since last reset  
ACCUMULATED KA  
PHASE A  
ACCUMULATED KA  
PHASE B xxx  
ACCUMULATED KA  
PHASE C xxx  
MAINTENANCE DATA  
CLEAR NO  
DATA CLEARED  
LAST: xx/xx/xx  
xxx  
3
Press STORE button to reset trip counter  
Date of last reset  
MAINTENANCE DATA  
END OF PAGE  
Page footer  
ACTUAL VALUES  
OPERATIONS DATA  
Page header  
TIMED PHASE O/C  
TRIPS ###  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page  
Value  
Text Displayed  
Description  
3
INST PHASE O/C  
TRIPS ###  
4
TIMED GROUND O/C  
TRIPS ###  
4
5
INST GROUND O/C  
TRIPS ###  
6
OVERVOLTAGE  
TRIPS ###  
7
UNDERVOLTAGE  
TRIPS ###  
8
ANALOG INPUT  
TRIPS ###  
9
CLEAR OPERATIONS  
Press STORE button to clear trip counters  
DATA?  
NO  
10  
11  
1
DATA CLEARED  
LAST 0/0/0  
OPERATIONS DATA  
END OF PAGE  
Page footer  
Page header  
ACTUAL VALUES  
PRE-TRIP DATA  
2
3
ALARM PHASE O/C  
ALARM: GROUND  
O/C  
4
5
6
ALARM: OVERVOLT  
ALARM: UNDERVOLT  
ALARM: ANALOG  
INPUT  
7
ALARM:  
ACCUMULATED KA  
8
9
SWITCH ALARM 1  
ALARM: AMPS  
DEMAND  
10  
11  
ALARM: KW DEMAND  
ALARM: KVAR  
DEMAND  
12  
ALARM: POWER  
FACTOR  
13  
14  
15  
16  
ALARM: FREQUENCY  
ALARM: TRIP COIL  
5
ALARM: MTM COMM  
CAUSE OF LAST TRIP:  
94  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page  
Value  
Text Displayed  
Description  
17  
TIME OVERCURRENT  
PHASE ABC  
Only phases in alarm are displayed  
or  
TIME OVERCURRENT GROUND  
or  
INST OVERCURRENT PHASE ABC  
or  
UNDERVOLTAGE FAULT  
or  
OVERVOLTAGE FAULT  
or  
x is in range 1-4  
EXTERNAL TRIP #x  
or  
ANALOG INPUT  
or  
POWER FACTOR FAULT  
or  
FREQUENCY FAULT  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
PHASE A PRE-TRIP  
CURRENT xxx A  
Value in amps  
Value in amps  
Value in amps  
Value in amps  
PHASE B PRE-TRIP  
CURRENT xxx A  
PHASE C PRE-TRIP  
CURRENT xxx A  
GROUND PRE-TRIP  
CURRENT xxx A  
PRE -TRIP VOLTAGE  
A-B xxx.xx kV  
If configured as Delta  
or  
or  
A-N xxx.xx kV  
If configured as Wye  
23  
24  
PRE -TRIP VOLTAGE  
B-C xxx.xx kV  
If configured as Delta  
or  
or  
B-N xxx.xx kV  
If configured as Wye  
PRE -TRIP VOLTAGE  
C-A xxx.xx kV  
If configured as Delta  
or  
or  
C-N xxx.xx kV  
If configured as Wye  
25  
26  
27  
28  
FREQUENCY AT  
TRIP xxx.xx Hz  
DATE OF TRIP  
xx/xx/xx  
mm/dd/yy  
hh:mm:ss  
Page footer  
TIME OF TRIP  
xx:xx:xx  
PRE-TRIP DATA  
END OF PAGE  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page  
Value  
Text Displayed  
Description  
1
ACTUAL VALUES  
VOLTAGE  
Page header  
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
VOLTAGE A-B  
xxx.xx kV  
6
VOLTAGE B-C  
xxx.xx kV  
VOLTAGE C-A  
xxx.xx kV  
FREQUENCY OF  
FEEDER xxx.xx Hz  
VOLTAGE  
END OF PAGE  
Page footer  
ACTUAL VALUES  
EVENT  
Page header  
NO OF EVENTS  
xxx  
Displayed only if enabled  
or  
EVENT RECORDING  
DISABLED  
7
3
4
5
1
2
CLEAR EVENTS?  
NO  
Press STORE button to clear event counter  
Date of last reset: mm/dd/yy  
Page footer  
EVENTS CLEARED  
LAST: xx/xx/xx  
EVENT  
END OF PAGE  
ACTUAL VALUES  
DEMAND DATA  
Page header  
PH-A PEAK DEMAND  
xxx A  
Value in amps  
or  
or  
AMPS DEMAND  
DISABLED  
Next prompt is CLEAR AMP DEMAND  
3
4
5
6
7
PH-B PEAK DEMAND  
xxx A  
Value in amps  
PH-C PEAK DEMAND  
xxx A  
Value in amps  
CLEAR AMP DEMAND  
Press STORE button to reset amp data  
Date of last reset: mm/dd/yy  
DATA?  
DATA CLEARED  
LAST: xx/xx/xx  
NO  
8
PEAK KW DEMAND  
xxx kW  
or  
or  
KW DEMAND  
DISABLED  
Displayed if disabled  
8
9
CLEAR KW DEMAND  
Press STORE button to reset kilowatt data  
Date of last reset: mm/dd/yy  
DATA?  
NO  
KW DEMAND DATA  
CL’D: xx/xx/xx  
96  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page  
Value  
Text Displayed  
Description  
10  
PEAK KVAR DEMAND  
xxx kVAR  
or  
or  
KVAR DEMAND  
DISABLED  
Displayed if disabled  
11  
12  
CLEAR KVAR DEMAND  
Press STORE button to reset kVAR data  
Date of last reset: mm/dd/yy  
DATA?  
NO  
KVAR DEMAND DATA  
CL’D: xx/xx/xx  
13  
1
DEMAND DATA  
END OF PAGE  
Page footer  
Page header  
METERING DATA  
DEMAND DATA  
2
POWER FACTOR  
LAGGING: x.xx  
If PF < 0  
or  
or  
LEADING: x.xx  
If PF > 0  
3
4
5
6
7
FREQUENCY MTM  
x.xx Hz  
9
REAL POWER  
xxx kW  
REACTIVE POWER  
xxx kVAR  
ENERGY USED  
xxx MWHRS  
METERING DATA  
END OF PAGE  
Page footer  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(This page left blank intentionally)  
98  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features of Tabular Data Screen  
Wizards  
Introduction  
This chapter describes the features available with tabular data screens. The set of  
features basic to all tabular data screens is described first, then any unique features  
are described for each device.  
Features of Tabular Data Screens  
The upper left-hand area of every tabular data screen contains a 3-D graphic of the  
device faceplate. This graphic is simply to verify identification and is not animated.  
The middle area on the left-hand side displays common information about the device.  
It provides a quick indication of how the device is configured and contains no  
animation.  
The buttons on the lower-left of the screen provide features described below. Not all  
devices support all of these buttons, so on some screens one or more of the buttons  
may be grayed out.  
The Help button calls up the PMCS help file with regard to the current  
device.  
The Exit button closes the tabular data screen.  
The Events button starts or jumps to the PMCS Event Logger client  
program and displays its window in the foreground.  
The Trend button displays the trend window that was specified in the  
configuration dialog. The button will be disabled if no trend window  
was specified during configuration of the Wizard.  
The Wave button runs the PMCS Waveform Capture client program for  
that device. This button is only enabled for devices supporting  
waveform capture.  
The Setup button displays the trend window that was specified in the  
configuration dialog. The button will be disabled if no setup window  
was specified during configuration of the Wizard.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The right side of the screen contains a display of the device data. The tabs at the  
bottom enable you to select among the various data tables which can be displayed.  
The number of tabs (screens) varies according to the type and amount of data  
available from the device. The two main types of data are metering, which shows the  
data being monitored by the device, and setup, which is used to configure the device.  
Other tabs may be available depending on the device’s capabilities.  
Some devices have push buttons that reset events or clear accumulated data; these  
will be discussed below in the individual device sections. These functions are  
represented by 3-D push buttons on the tabular data screens. When a button is  
pressed, a dialog box appears that either asks for confirmation of the action or states  
that the operator has an insufficient access level to perform the operation. If security  
is enabled in your InTouch application, the current operator must have an Access  
level greater than or equal to the Access level configured for each tabular wizard in  
order to issue device commands. See the Wonderware InTouch documentation for  
more information on how to use security features within InTouch.  
100  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power Leader EPM  
The Power Leader EPM Tabular Data Screen wizard provides the following  
command buttons:  
Tab  
Button  
Function  
Setup  
Meter Initialize  
Clear Errors  
Demand Reset  
Energy Reset  
Performs a complete meter reset  
Clears the event log in the meter  
Clears the watt demand register in the meter  
Clears the accumulated energy registers in the meter  
Table 12. PLEPM Tabular data screen commands.  
Another feature to bear in mind when working with the PLEPM tabular wizard is:  
The Normal Metering screen displays one of two tables depending on  
whether the meter is configured as Delta or Wye.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spectra MicroVersaTrip  
The Spectra MicroVersaTrip Tabular Data Screen wizard provides the following  
command buttons on the Setup screen:  
Tab  
Button  
Download  
Refresh  
Function  
Setup  
Downloads the energy demand interval to the DDE Server  
Loads the energy demand interval from the DDE Server  
into the screen display  
Clear Demand  
Clears the accumulated energy  
Table 13. Spectra MVT Tabular data screen commands.  
Another feature to bear in mind when working with the Spectra MicroVersaTrip  
tabular wizard is:  
The data entry field for the energy demand interval can be set to values  
of 5 to 60 minutes in increments of 5 minutes.  
102  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enhanced MicroVersaTrip-C Trip Unit  
The Enhanced MicroVersaTrip-C Tabular Data Screen provides six push buttons on  
the Setup screen:  
Tab  
Button  
Function  
Setup  
Energy  
Clears the accumulated energy registers in the trip unit  
Clears the peak demand register in the trip unit  
Resets the instantaneous trip counter in the trip unit  
Resets the short-time trip counter in the trip unit  
Resets the long-time trip counter in the trip unit  
Resets the ground fault trip counter in the trip unit  
Demand  
Inst. Trip  
Short Trip  
Long Trip  
Ground Fault  
Table 14. EMVT-C Tabular data screen commands.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enhanced MicroVersaTrip-D Trip Unit  
The Enhanced MicroVersaTrip-D Tabular Data Screen provides six push buttons on  
the Setup tab:  
Tab  
Button  
Energy  
Function  
Setup  
Clears the accumulated energy registers in the trip unit  
Clears the peak demand register in the trip unit  
Resets the instantaneous trip counter in the trip unit  
Resets the short-time trip counter in the trip unit  
Resets the long-time trip counter in the trip unit  
Resets the ground fault trip counter in the trip unit  
Demand  
Inst. Trip  
Short Trip  
Long Trip  
Ground Fault  
Table 15. EMVT-D Tabular data screen commands.  
104  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
POWER LEADER Meter  
The POWER LEADER Meter Tabular Data Screen wizard provides three push  
buttons on the Command screen:  
Tab  
Button  
Function  
Command  
Energy /VARH Clear  
Clears the accumulated energy registers in  
the meter  
Peak Current Clear  
Clears the peak current register in the meter  
Clears the peak demand in the meter  
Peak Watt Demand  
Clear  
Table 16. PL Meter Tabular data screen commands.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spectra ECM  
The Spectra ECM Tabular Data Screen wizard performs the following actions with  
push buttons on the Command screen:  
Tab  
Button  
Function  
Command  
Contactor 1 Start  
Contactor 2 Fast Start  
Contactor 2 Rev Start  
Stop 1 & 2  
Closes contactor 1  
Initiates a fast start of contactor 2  
Reverse closes contactor 2  
Opens contactors 1 and 2  
Completely resets the ECM  
Resets the temperature memory in the ECM  
Trips the ECM contactors  
ECM Reset  
Initialize Temperature  
Trip ECM Contactor  
Table 17. Spectra ECM Tabular data screen commands.  
106  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MDP Digital Overcurrent Relay  
The feature to bear in mind when working with the MDP tabular wizard is:  
On the Setup screen, you must enter a value into the CT Ratio box. This value is multiplied by the values in  
the amp registers to convert the latter into user units. If you do not enter a value for the CT Ratio, the  
message “CT Ratio has not been entered” appears on the bottom of the Tabular Data Screen and on the  
Large Faceplate wizard.  
Monitoring Tab  
The MDP Monitoring Screen shows the following:  
Metering values of RMS Current, RMS Trip Current and Phase Trip Status  
Trip Time  
Status  
External Inputs  
The message “CT Ratios has not been entered!” will appear when no CT Ratio entered on the Setup tab. Click on Setup  
Screen Tab to enter the CT Ratio.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Tab  
The MDP Tabular Data Screen wizard has three command buttons:  
Tab  
Button  
Function  
Command  
Open Breaker  
Close Breaker  
Reset Fault  
Opens the breaker.  
Closes the breaker.  
Clears the event table in the MDP  
Table 18. MDP Tabular data screen commands.  
The MDP Command Screen shows 3 buttons:  
Open Breaker: Opens the Breaker  
Close Breaker: Closes the Breaker  
Reset Fault: Clears the Event Table in the MDP  
The screen also shows the Breaker Status, for example OPEN.  
108  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup Tab  
The MDP Setup Screen shows:  
Phase Settings Configuration  
Ground Settings Configuration  
You must enter CT Ratio in the relevant field.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PQM (Power Quality Meter)  
All six function buttons under the Info box are enabled for the PQM.  
The PQM Tabular Data Screen wizard has nine command buttons, described below.  
Tab  
Button  
Function  
Metering  
Clear Energy  
Clears the PQM’s energy counters  
Reset Device  
Issues a RESET command to the PQM  
Demand  
Clear Max Demand Values  
Clear Frequency Values  
Clear Current Min/Max  
Clear Voltage Min/Max  
Clear Power Min/Max  
Clear Max THD Values  
Reset Pulse Counter  
Clears the PQM’s Max Demand values from memory  
Clears the PQM's Max Frequency values from memory  
Clears the PQM’s Current Min/Max values from memory  
Clears the PQM’s Voltage Min/Max values from memory  
Clears the PQM’s Power Min/Max values from memory  
Clears the PQM’s Max THD values from memory  
Resets the PQM’s pulse counter  
I, V Range  
P Range  
Analysis  
I/O  
Table 19. PQM Tabular data screen commands.  
See the PQM Instruction Manual (Chapter 5, Actual Values) for information on the  
display of data values under different device configurations. Values not configured  
for use are displayed as N/A.  
110  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Metering Tab  
The Multilin PQM Metering tab shows:  
Metering values: For A, B, C and 3 Phase  
Energy: In various values  
Output Relays: Alarm, Aux 1, Aux 2 and Aux 3  
The Clear Energy button, when clicked, will clear all energy values. The Reset Device button, when clicked, will reset  
the Device.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Tab  
The Multilin Status tab shows the status of Alarms, Aux1, Aux2, Aux3 Relays.  
112  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Demand Tab  
The Multilin PQM Demand screen shows :  
Demand Current & Power  
Peak Demand  
Minimum and Maximum Frequency and their Time Stamps.  
The Clear Max Demand Values button, when clicked, will clear all the maximum demand values. The Clear Frequency  
Values button, when clicked, will clear all the frequency values.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IV Range Tab  
The Multilin PQM IV Range tab shows the Minumum and Maximum Current, Voltage Values.  
The Clear Current Min/Max button, when clicked, will clear all the minimum and maximum values of the current.  
The Clear Voltage Min/Max button, when clicked, will clear all the minimum and maximum values of voltage.  
114  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P Range Tab  
The Multilin PQM Power Range screen shows the Power minimum and maximum values.  
The Clear Power Min/Max button, when clicked, will clear all the minimum and maximum values of the power.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analysis Tab  
The Multilin PQM Power Analysis screen shows:  
Power Quality Values  
Total Harmonic Distortion  
THD Max  
The Clear Max THD Values button, when clicked, will clear all maximum THD values.  
116  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IO Tab  
The Multilin PQM Inputs and Outputs screen shows:  
Digital Input Switches  
Output Relays  
Analog Input  
Switch Input Pulse Counters  
The Reset Pulse Counter button, when clicked, will reset all the pulse counter values.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setpoints Tab  
The Multilin PQM System Setpoints screen shows:  
Current Demand Type  
Current Demand Time Interval (m)  
Power Demand Type  
Power Demand Time Interval (m)  
Energy Cost Per kWh (cents)  
Neutral Current Sensing  
Analog Input Main Relay  
Analog Input Alt Relay  
Switch A Function  
Switch B Function  
Switch C Function  
Switch D Function  
118  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Motor Manager II (MMII)  
Five of the six function buttons under the Info box are enabled for the MMII; the  
Wave button is not supported for the MMII.  
The MMII Tabular Data Screen wizard has four command buttons, described below.  
Tab  
Button  
Function  
Metering  
Maintenance  
Clear Energy  
Clears the MMII's energy counters  
Clear Start/Trip Counters  
Clears the MMII's Start and Trip count values from  
memory  
Clear Timers  
Clears the MMII's Timer values from memory  
Clear Interlock Counter  
Clears the MMII’s Interlock Counter values from memory  
Table 20. MMII Tabular data screen commands.  
See the MMII's Instruction Manual (Chapter 5, Actual Values) for information on the  
display of data values under different device configurations. Values not configured  
for use are displayed as N/A.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPM 3710 Meter  
The EPM 3710 Tabular Data Screen wizard provides the following special features:  
The Normal Metering Values screen has a label that displays either kVA  
Demand or Amps Demand, depending on how the meter is configured.  
The Setpoints screen has two scroll buttons that determine which setpoint is  
displayed.  
The Setup tab contains a field "Iout Key" corresponding to the Iout Key display  
on the actual device. On the actual device, this field displays text messages such  
as "Voltage A" or "Current C". In the Tabular Data Screen wizard, these  
messages are presented as a numeric code and must be referenced against the  
following table.  
Code  
Meaning  
Voltage A  
Voltage B  
Voltage C  
Current A  
Current B  
Current C  
KVA  
Code  
9
Meaning  
Code  
18  
Meaning  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
KVA A  
KVA Total  
KVAR Total  
PF  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
KVA B  
19  
KVA C  
20  
KVAR A  
21  
KW Demand  
Amp Demand  
Frequency  
Vaux  
KVAR B  
22  
KVAR C  
23  
VOLTAGE AVG  
CURRENT AVG  
KW Total  
24  
KWB  
25  
Current I4  
KWC  
120  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPM 3720 Meter  
The EPM 3720 Tabular Data Screen wizard has several special features. You can use  
the Setup 1, Setup 2, and Setpoints screens to change the meter configuration. Values  
displayed in white boxes are changeable. Some are changed by clicking on the  
displayed value, while others provide scroll buttons, and some have both.  
The Download and Refresh buttons on the Setup 1 and Setup 2 screens  
upload and download the values for all of the setup parameters.  
The Download and Refresh buttons on the Setpoints screen upload and  
download all of the setpoints from the device.  
The Reset Energy Integrators and Reset All Min/Max buttons on the  
Setup 1 screen provide the named functions.  
The Sliding Demand tab supports downloading of up to 10 sliding  
demand measurements to the device. See Appendix B for information  
on setting the sliding demand keys.  
To change setpoints at the device, first press the Refresh button to upload current  
setpoint values from the device (otherwise the defaults are shown and used for  
download). Modify setpoints as desired, then press the Download button to send all  
setpoints to unit.  
When you first open the EPM 3720 Tabular Data Screen, you may see values of zero  
in all fields. The EPM 3720 Tabular Data Screen requires some user interaction  
(such as pressing a key) to update its values.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPM 7300 Meter  
The EPM 7300 Tabular Data Screen wizard has several special features. You can use  
the Setup screen to change the meter configuration. Values displayed in white boxes  
are changeable. Some are changed by clicking on the displayed value, while others  
are changed by clicking on the associated scroll button. The Download and Refresh  
buttons on the setup screen upload and download all of the setpoints from the device.  
To change setpoints at the device, first press the refresh button to upload current  
setpoint values from the device (otherwise the defaults are shown and used for  
download). Modify setpoints as desired, then press the download button to send all  
setpoints to the unit.  
The EPM 7300 Tabular Data Screen’s command buttons are described below:  
Tab  
Button  
Function  
Metering  
Reset Energy  
Resets all Energy Integrators in the meter.  
MIN/MAX Demand  
Digital Input Labels  
The user can enter descriptive text (up to 20 characters) for each digital  
input. These labels are retentive.  
Force ON  
Force OFF  
For each digital output, this button will force the output to the ON state.  
For each digital output, this button will force the output to the OFF state.  
Resets all Sliding Demand Values in the device.  
Reset Sliding  
Demand  
Reset Min/Max  
Resets all Min/Max values in the device.  
Table 21. EPM 7300 Tabular data screen commands.  
122  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Metering Tab  
The 7300 ION Normal Metering Values screen shows the metering values:  
A, B and C  
Three Phase Values  
Voltage Imbalance  
Current Imbalance  
Frequency (Hz)  
Phase Reversal  
Energy  
The Reset Energy button will reset the energy.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Min/Max Tab  
The 7300 ION Min/Max/Demand Values screen shows:  
Minimum and maximum metering values  
Digital Outputs  
1. By clicking on the Text box provided, a popup box will be appeared where text can be entered.  
2. By clicking on Force ON and Force OFF the status can be seen as ON or OFF respectively.  
Sliding Window Demand and Predicted Windows Demand  
The Reset Sliding Demand button, when clicked, will reset all Sliding Demand values in the device.  
The Reset Min/Max button, when clicked, will reset all Min/Max values in the device.  
124  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup Tab  
The 7300 ION Setup screen shows various setup values of the device such as Volts Mode, Phase Order, PT Secondary  
and CT Secondary.  
The Download button, when clicked, will download all relevant values in the device.  
The Refresh button, when clicked, will refresh all the values coming from the device.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPM 7330 Meter  
The EPM 7330 Tabular Data Screen wizard has several special features. You can use  
the Setup screen to change the meter configuration. Values displayed in white boxes  
are changeable. Some are changed by clicking on the displayed value, while others  
are changed by clicking on the associated scroll button. The Download and Refresh  
buttons on the setup screen upload and download all of the setpoints from the device.  
To change setpoints at the device, first press the refresh button to upload current  
setpoint values from the device (otherwise the defaults are shown and used for  
download). Modify setpoints as desired, then press the download button to send all  
setpoints to the unit.  
The EPM 7330 Tabular Data Screen’s command buttons are described below:  
Tab  
Button  
Function  
Metering  
Reset Energy  
Resets all Energy Integrators in the meter.  
MIN/MAX Demand  
Digital Input Labels  
The user can enter descriptive text (up to 20 characters) for each digital  
input. These labels are retentive.  
Force ON  
Force OFF  
For each digital output, this button will force the output to the ON state.  
For each digital output, this button will force the output to the OFF state.  
Resets all Sliding Demand Values in the device.  
Reset Sliding  
Demand  
Reset Min/Max  
Resets all Min/Max values in the device.  
Table 22. EPM 7330 Tabular data screen commands  
126  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Metering Tab  
The 7330 ION Normal Metering Values screen shows the metering values:  
A, B and C  
Three Phase Values  
Voltage Imbalance  
Current Imbalance  
Frequency (Hz)  
Phase Reversal  
Energy  
The Reset Energy button will reset the energy.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Min/Max  
The 7330 ION Min/Max/Demand Values screen shows:  
Minimum and maximum metering values  
Digital Outputs  
1. By clicking on the Text box provided, a popup box will be appeared where text can be entered.  
2. By clicking on Force ON and Force OFF the status can be seen as ON or OFF respectively.  
Sliding Window Demand and Predicted Windows Demand  
The Reset Sliding Demand button, when clicked, will reset all Sliding Demand values in the device.  
The Reset Min/Max button, when clicked, will reset all Min/Max values in the device.  
128  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup Tab  
The 7330 ION Setup screen shows various setup values of the device such as Volts Mode, Phase Order, PT Secondary  
and CT Secondary.  
The Download button, when clicked, will download all relevant values in the device.  
The Refresh button, when clicked, will refresh all the values coming from the device.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPM 7500/7600 Meter  
The EPM 7500/7600 Tabular Data Screen wizard has several special features. You  
can use the Setup screen to change the meter configuration. Values displayed in white  
boxes are changeable. Some are changed by clicking on the displayed value, while  
others are changed by clicking on the associated scroll button. The Download and  
Refresh buttons on the setup screen upload and download all of the setpoints from the  
device.  
To change setpoints at the device, first press the refresh button to upload current  
setpoint values from the device (otherwise the defaults are shown and used for  
download). Modify setpoints as desired, then press the download button to send all  
setpoints to the unit.  
In the following pages, each of the 7500/7600 Meter’s Tabular Data Screen Wizards’  
tabs will be displayed and detailed.  
Metering Tab  
EPM 7500/7600 Meter - Metering Data Screen  
The Metering tab displays the following metered values from the EPM 7500/7600.  
Vln A, B: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
Vln C: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
Vln Avg: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
Vll AB  
Vll BC, CA, and Avg: n/a when Voltage Mode is SINGLE  
I A, B, Neutral, and Avg  
130  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I C: n/a when Voltage Mode is SINGLE  
KW A, B: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
KW C: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
KW Total  
KVA A, B: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
KVA C: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
KVA Total  
KVAR A, B: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
KVAR C: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
KVAR Total  
Power Factor Lead A, B: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or PF is  
Lagging  
Power Factor Lead C: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
or PF is Lagging  
Power Factor Lead Total: n/a when PF is Lagging  
Power Factor Lag A, B: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or PF is  
Leading  
Power Factor Lag C: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE or  
PF is Leading  
Power Factor Lag Total: n/a when PF is Leading  
Power Factor Total A, B: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
Power Factor Total C: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
Power Factor Total  
Total Harmonic Distortion – Voltage A, B, and C: n/a when Source is  
n/a.  
Total Harmonic Distortion – Current A, B, C, and Neutral: n/a when  
Source is n/a.  
K Factor A, B, C, and Neutral: n/a when Source is n/a.  
Three-Phase Values  
Vab, Vbc, Vca  
Voltage Unbalance  
Current Unbalance  
Frequency  
Phase Reversal (On, Off) : n/a when Voltage Mode is SINGLE  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Min/Max Tab  
EPM 7500/7600 Meter - Min/Max Tab  
The Minimum/Maximum Values tab displays a variety of minimum and maximum  
values recorded by the EPM 7500/7600. Select Show Minimum or Show Maximum  
buttons to display either the minimum or maximum values for the displayed  
parameters. To reset all min/max values, select the Reset Min/Max button.  
Min/Max values may be displayed for the following parameters:  
Phase A, B, C, Neutral and Average Values  
Vln A, B: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
Vln C: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
Vln Avg: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
Vll AB  
Vll BC, CA, and Avg: n/a when Voltage Mode is SINGLE  
I A, B, Neutral, and Avg  
I C: n/a when Voltage Mode is SINGLE  
Total Harmonic Distortion – Voltage A, B, and C: n/a when Source is n/a.  
Total Harmonic Distortion – Current A, B, C, and Neutral: n/a when Source  
is n/a.  
K Factor A, B, C, and Neutral: n/a when Source is n/a.  
Three-Phase Values  
Vab, Vbc, Vca  
Power Factor Lead Total: n/a when PF is Lagging  
Power Factor Lag Total: n/a when PF is Leading  
Voltage Unbalance  
132  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Frequency  
Power Quality Tab  
EPM 7500/7600 Meter - Power Quality Tab  
The Power Quality tab displays the following power quality values from the EPM  
7500/7600.  
Symmetric Components  
Zero Sequence Phase and Magnitude for Current and Voltage  
Positive Sequence Phase and Magnitude for Current and Voltage  
Negative Sequence Phase and Magnitude for Current and Voltage  
Disturbance Counts  
Sag / Swell Counter  
Relative Setpoints  
Over KW Sliding Window Demand Status  
Over Current Phase A Status  
Over Current Phase B Status  
Over Current Phase C Status  
Over Voltage Unbalance Status  
*Note: no color code is used for the Relative Setpoint Status.  
The Power Quality tab also provides push buttons for performing the following  
commands:  
Reset Sag Swell Disturbance Counter – Resets Sag Swell Counter.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enable/Disable Sag Swell – Enables or Disables Sag Swell Tracking.  
Enable/Disable Over KW SWD – Enables or Disables Over Real Power Sliding  
Window Demand for Relative Setpoint Tracking.  
Enable/Disable Over Current – Enables or Disables Over Current for Phases A, B,  
and C for Relative Setpoint Tracking.  
Enable/Disable Over Vunb – Enables or Disables Over Voltage Unbalance for  
Relative Setpoint Tracking.  
Demand Tab  
EPM 7500/7600 Meter - Demand Tab  
The Demand tab displays the following demand values from the EPM 7500/7600.  
Energy  
Real Energy Import, Export, Total, and Net  
Reactive Energy Import, Export, Total, and Net  
Apparent Energy Total  
Demand  
Real Power Sliding Window Demand, Predicted Demand, and Thermal  
Demand  
Reactive Power Sliding Window Demand, Predicted Demand, and  
Thermal Demand  
Apparent Power Sliding Window Demand, Predicted Demand, and  
Thermal Demand  
134  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Average RMS Current Sliding Window Demand, Predicted Demand,  
and Thermal Demand  
Minimum/Peak Demand  
Minimum or Peak Real Power Sliding Window Demand, Total  
Demand, and Thermal Demand  
Minimum or Peak Reactive Power Sliding Window Demand, Total  
Demand, and Thermal Demand  
Minimum or Peak Apparent Power Sliding Window Demand, Total  
Demand, and Thermal Demand  
The Demand tab also provides push buttons for performing the following commands:  
Reset Energy – Resets Energy Demand values identified above.  
Reset SWD– Resets Sliding Window Demand values identified above.  
Reset Thermal – Resets Thermal Demand values identified above.  
Reset Peak Resets Peak Demand values identified above.  
The Minimum/Peak panel's Show Maximum and Show Minimum buttons can be  
used to toggle the display between minimums and peaks.  
Inputs Tab  
EPM 7500/7600 Meter - Inputs Tab  
The Inputs tab displays the following values from the EPM 7500/7600.  
Digital Inputs  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status (On, Off) for Status Inputs (SI) 1-8. (Color Code: Green – ON,  
Grey – OFF).  
Counters for SI1-8.  
The Inputs tab also provides push buttons for performing the following commands:  
Reset Counters – Resets Digital Input Status Counters for SI1-8.  
The Inputs tab also provides retentive memory inputs for the following:  
Digital Input Names for SI1-8.  
Setup 1 Tab  
EPM 7500/7600 Meter - Setup 1 Tab  
The Setup 1 tab displays the following demand values from the EPM 7500/7600.  
Power Settings  
Volts Mode  
Phase Order  
Voltage Polarity for A, B, and C  
Current Polarity for A, B, C, and Neutral  
Transformer Ratio Settings  
PT and CT Primary  
PT and CT Secondary  
136  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Neutral CT Primary and Secondary  
Communications  
Baud Rate for Comm 1, 2, and 3.  
Unit ID for Comm 1, 2, and 3.  
Protocol for Comm 1, 2, and 3.  
Mode for Comm 1.  
IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway.  
The Setup 1 tab also provides push buttons for performing the following commands:  
Download – Executes a script to check for values that have changed and downloads  
those values to the device via the GE 7700 Gateway.  
Refresh – Executes a script to upload all of the meter values for the settings on the  
screen.  
Note: Be sure to click the Refresh button prior to changing or downloading any  
settings to the EPM7500 or EPM7600, as the latest settings may not be displayed.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup 2 Tab  
EPM 7500/7600 Meter - Setup 2 Tab  
The Setup 2 tab displays the following demand values from the EPM 7500/7600.  
Sliding Window Demand Settings  
Sliding Demand Sub Interval Settings for KW, KVAR, KVA, and Iavg.  
Sliding Demand Number of Sub Intervals for KW, KVAR, KVA, and  
Iavg.  
Sliding Demand Predicted Response for KW, KVAR, KVA, and Iavg.  
Waveform Recorder Settings  
Depth of Waveform Recorder  
Sag / Swell / Transient Settings  
Sag / Swell Nominal  
Sag Limit  
Swell Limit  
Change Criteria  
Relative Setpoint Settings  
Nominal value for Over KW, Over Current, and Over Vunbal.  
Under Dropout for Over KW, Over Current, and Over Vunbal.  
Over Dropout for Over KW, Over Current, and Over Vunbal.  
Under Pickup for Over KW, Over Current, and Over Vunbal.  
138  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Over Pickup for Over KW, Over Current, and Over Vunbal.  
Time On for Over KW, Over Current, and Over Vunbal.  
Time Off for Over KW, Over Current, and Over Vunbal.  
The Setup 2 tab also provides push buttons for performing the following commands:  
Download– Executes a script to check for values that have changed and downloads  
those values to the device via the GE 7700 Gateway.  
Refresh– .Executes a script to upload all of the meter values for the settings on the  
screen.  
Note: Be sure to click the Refresh button prior to changing or downloading any  
settings to the EPM7500 or EPM7600, as the latest settings may not be displayed.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPM 7700 Meter  
The EPM 7700 Tabular Data Screen wizard has several special features. You can use  
the Setup screen to change the meter configuration. Values displayed in white boxes  
are changeable. Some are changed by clicking on the displayed value, while others  
are changed by clicking on the associated scroll button. The Download and Refresh  
buttons on the setup screen upload and download all of the setpoints from the device.  
To change setpoints at the device, first press the refresh button to upload current  
setpoint values from the device (otherwise the defaults are shown and used for  
download). Modify setpoints as desired, then press the download button to send all  
setpoints to the unit.  
In the following pages, each of the 7700 ION Meter’s Tabular Data Screen Wizards’  
tabs will be displayed and detailed.  
Metering Tab  
EPM 7700 ION Meter - Metering Data Screen  
The Metering tab displays the following metered values from the EPM 7700.  
Vln A, B: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
Vln C: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
Vln Avg: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
I A, B, Neutral, and Avg  
I C: n/a when Voltage Mode is SINGLE  
Vll AB  
Vll BC, CA, and Avg: n/a when Voltage Mode is SINGLE  
140  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KW A, B: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
KW C: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
KW Total  
KVAR A, B: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
KVAR C: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
KVAR Total  
KVA A, B: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
KVA C: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
KVA Total  
Power Factor Lead A, B: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or PF is  
Lagging  
Power Factor Lead C: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
or PF is Lagging  
Power Factor Lead Total: n/a when PF is Lagging  
Power Factor Lag A, B: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or PF is  
Leading  
Power Factor Lag C: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE or  
PF is Leading  
Power Factor Lag Total: n/a when PF is Leading  
Power Factor Total A, B: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
Power Factor Total C: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
Power Factor Total  
Total Harmonic Distortion – Voltage A, B, and C: n/a when Source is  
n/a.  
Total Harmonic Distortion – Current A, B, C, and Neutral: n/a when  
Source is n/a.  
K Factor A, B, C, and Neutral: n/a when Source is n/a.  
Voltage Unbalance  
Current Unbalance  
Frequency  
Phase Reversal (On, Off) : n/a when Voltage Mode is SINGLE  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Min/Max Tab  
EPM 7700 ION Meter - Min/Max Tab  
The Minimum/Maximum Values tab displays a variety of minimum and maximum  
values recorded by the EPM 7700. Select Show Minimum or Show Maximum  
buttons to display either the minimum or maximum values for the displayed  
parameters. To reset all min/max values, select the Reset Min/Max button.  
Min/Max values may be displayed for the following parameters:  
Vln A, B: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
Vln C: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA or SINGLE  
Vln Avg: n/a when Voltage Mode is DELTA  
I A, B, Neutral, and Avg  
I C: n/a when Voltage Mode is SINGLE  
Vll AB  
Vll BC, CA, and Avg: n/a when Voltage Mode is SINGLE  
KW Total  
KVAR Total  
KVA Total  
Power Factor Lead Total: n/a when PF is Lagging  
Power Factor Lag Total: n/a when PF is Leading  
Power Factor Total Total  
Total Harmonic Distortion – Voltage A, B, and C: n/a when Source is n/a.  
Total Harmonic Distortion – Current A, B, C, and Neutral: n/a when Source  
is n/a.  
K Factor A, B, C, and Neutral: n/a when Source is n/a.  
Voltage Unbalance  
Frequency  
142  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power Quality Tab  
EPM 7700 ION Meter - Power Quality Tab  
The Power Quality tab displays the following power quality values from the EPM  
7700.  
Disturbance Monitoring  
Sag / Swell Counter  
Transient Counter  
Over KW Sliding Window Demand Status  
Over Current Phase A Status  
Over Current Phase B Status  
Over Current Phase C Status  
Over Voltage Unbalance Status  
*Note: no color code is used for the Relative Setpoint Status.  
Symmetric Components  
Zero Sequence Magnitude for Current and Voltage  
Zero Sequence Phase for Current and Voltage  
Positive Sequence Magnitude for Current and Voltage  
Positive Sequence Phase for Current and Voltage  
Negative Sequence Magnitude for Current and Voltage  
Negative Sequence Phase for Current and Voltage  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Power Quality tab also provides push buttons for performing the following  
commands:  
Reset Disturbance Counters – Resets Sag Swell and Transient Counters.  
Enable/Disable Sag Swell – Enables or Disables Sag Swell Tracking.  
Enable/Disable Transient – Enables or Disables Transient Tracking.  
Enable/Disable Over KW – Enables or Disables Over Real Power Sliding Window  
Demand for Relative Setpoint Tracking.  
Enable/Disable Over Amps – Enables or Disables Over Current for Phases A, B,  
and C for Relative Setpoint Tracking.  
Enable/Disable Over Vunb – Enables or Disables Over Voltage Unbalance for  
Relative Setpoint Tracking.  
Demand Tab  
EPM 7700 ION Meter - Demand Tab  
The Demand tab displays the following demand values from the EPM 7700.  
Energy  
Real Energy Import, Export, Total, and Net  
Reactive Energy Import, Export, Total, and Net  
Apparent Energy Total  
Sliding Window Demand (SWD)  
Real Power Sliding Window Demand and Predicted Demand  
Reactive Power Sliding Window Demand and Predicted Demand  
Apparent Power Sliding Window Demand and Predicted Demand  
144  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Average RMS Current Sliding Window Demand and Predicted Demand  
Thermal Demand  
Real Power Thermal Demand  
Reactive Power Thermal Demand  
Apparent Power Thermal Demand  
Average RMS Current Thermal Demand  
The Demand tab also provides push buttons for performing the following commands:  
Reset Energy – Resets Energy Demand values identified above.  
Reset SWD– Resets Sliding Window Demand values identified above.  
Thermal Demand – Resets Thermal Demand values identified above.  
Inputs Tab  
EPM 7700 ION Meter - Inputs Tab  
The Inputs tab displays the following values from the EPM 7700.  
Digital Inputs  
Status (On, Off) for Status Inputs (SI) 1-8. (Color Code: Green – ON,  
Grey – OFF).  
Counters for SI1-8.  
Analog Inputs  
Zero Scale Setting for AI1-4. : n/a when doesn’t exist on the meter  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Full Scale Setting for AI1-4. : n/a when doesn’t exist on the meter  
Scaled Value for AI1-4. : n/a when doesn’t exist on the meter  
The Inputs tab also provides push buttons for performing the following commands:  
Reset Counters – Resets Digital Input Status Counters for SI1-8.  
The Inputs tab also provides retentive memory inputs for the following:  
Digital Input Names for SI1-8.  
Analog Input Names for AI1-4. : n/a when doesn’t exist on the meter  
Setup 1 Tab  
EPM 7700 ION Meter - Setup 1 Tab  
The Setup 1 tab displays the following demand values from the EPM 7700.  
Power Settings  
Volts Mode  
Phase Order  
Voltage Polarity for A, B, and C  
Current Polarity for A, B, C, and Neutral  
Transformer Ratio Settings  
PT and CT Primary  
PT and CT Secondary  
Neutral CT Primary and Secondary  
146  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications  
Baud Rate for Comm 1, 2, and 3.  
Unit ID for Comm 1, 2, and 3.  
Protocol for Comm 1, 2, and 3.  
Mode for Comm 1.  
Ethernet Protocol, IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway.  
The Setup 1 tab also provides push buttons for performing the following commands:  
Download – Executes a script to check for values that have changed and downloads  
those values to the device via the GE 7700 Gateway.  
Refresh – Executes a script to upload all of the meter values for the settings on the  
screen.  
Note: Be sure to click the Refresh button prior to changing or downloading any  
settings to the EPM7700, as the latest settings may not be displayed.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup 2 Tab  
EPM 7700 ION Meter - Setup 2 Tab  
The Setup 2 tab displays the following demand values from the EPM 7700.  
Sliding Window Demand Settings  
Sliding Demand Sub Interval Settings for KW, KVAR, KVA, and Iavg.  
Sliding Demand Number of Sub Intervals for KW, KVAR, KVA, and  
Iavg.  
Sliding Demand Predicted Response for KW, KVAR, KVA, and Iavg.  
Waveform Recorder Settings  
Depth of Waveform Recorder  
Sag / Swell / Transient Settings  
Sag / Swell Nominal  
Sag Limit  
Swell Limit  
Change Criteria  
Transient Threshold  
Relative Setpoint Settings  
Nominal value for Over KW, Over Current, and Over Vunbal.  
Under Dropout for Over KW, Over Current, and Over Vunbal.  
Over Dropout for Over KW, Over Current, and Over Vunbal.  
Under Pickup for Over KW, Over Current, and Over Vunbal.  
148  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Over Pickup for Over KW, Over Current, and Over Vunbal.  
Time On for Over KW, Over Current, and Over Vunbal.  
Time Off for Over KW, Over Current, and Over Vunbal.  
The Setup 2 tab also provides push buttons for performing the following commands:  
Download– Executes a script to check for values that have changed and downloads  
those values to the device via the GE 7700 Gateway.  
Refresh– .Executes a script to upload all of the meter values for the settings on the  
screen.  
Note: Be sure to click the Refresh button prior to changing or downloading any  
settings to the EPM7700, as the latest settings may not be displayed.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Universal Relay  
The Universal Relay devices are a highly-flexible family of power management  
devices based on the concept of a backplane and CPU supporting a wide variety of  
plug-in modules. These modules provide metering, monitoring, protection and  
control functions, and other abilities.  
A UR tabular wizard can display between one and eight screens of data – the number  
of screens is determined by the user during wizard configuration. There are a total of  
Twenty Three screens available, depending on the type of UR device connected. For  
example, the C30 device does not support any metering functions, so the metering an  
source tabs are not available for this device.  
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
The UR wizard supports connection to the PMCS Modbus and Ethernet servers and  
third party MMS servers. A UCA/MMS check box is provided on the wizard  
configuration dialog to correctly set up the Intouch tag names for use with MMS.  
Special Note: UCA/MMS support for PMCS 6.11a is removed. Do notcheck this  
checkbox.  
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Note: If WindowViewer is running when the wizard configuration dialog is called up,  
a message appears warning that any changes made to the UR wizard configuration  
will not take effect until WindowViewer is shut down and restarted. For example, if a  
user elects to change the number of tabs configured for a device, the changes will not  
be reflected in the runtime environment until WindowViewer is restarted.  
In the following pages, each of the Tabular Data Screen Wizards’ tabs will be  
displayed and described.  
150  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Metering Tab  
Universal Relay - Metering Data Screen  
The Metering tab displays the following metered values from the B30, C60, D60,  
F30, F35, F60, G60, L60, L90, M60 and T60 devices: Actual Values for Voltage,  
Current, Power, Power Factor, and Frequency. These values are detailed below.  
Current  
RMS Current for each phase, ground, and neutral  
Phasor magnitude and angle for each phase, ground and neutral  
Voltage  
RMS voltage for each phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral, and auxiliary voltage value.  
Phasor magnitude and angle for phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral and auxiliary  
voltage value.  
Phase-to-neutral voltages are displayed as "N/A" if derived from a source wired in a  
delta configuration.  
Power  
Shows Real (Watts), Reactive (VAR), and Apparent (VA) power values per phase  
and 3-phase.  
By default, all power values are displayed in terms of kW, kVAR, and kVA. These  
values will scale as appropriate to MW, MVAR, and MVA.  
Power values derived from a source wired in a delta configuration are displayed as  
"N/A".  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power Factor  
Shows the signed power factor value in percent.  
Power Factor values derived from a source wired in a delta configuration are  
displayed as "N/A".  
Frequency  
Frequency is shown in units of hertz.  
Frequency is only displayed if the Frequency Tracking Reference setpoint is set to a  
non-zero value.  
Power Quality Tab  
Universal Relay - Quality Tab  
The Quality tab provides six buttons labeled S1 – S6. These buttons enable you to  
select the source (1 – 6) for display. The text in the upper left corner of the tab  
indicates which source is currently displayed. Buttons are disabled for sources that  
have not been configured or enabled in the attached device. The Voltage parameters  
displayed are dependent on CT/VT configuration of the device hardware.  
For the selected source, the Quality tab displays actual values for Zero Sequence,  
Positive Sequence, and Negative Sequence currents and voltages. The following  
devices are supported: B30, C30, C60, D60, F30, F35, F60, G60, L60, L90, M60 and  
T60. The displayed values are described below.  
Current  
Phasor magnitude and angle for negative, positive and zero sequence currents.  
152  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voltage  
Phasor magnitude and angle for negative, positive and zero sequence voltages.  
Voltage values derived from a source wired in a delta configuration will appear as  
"N/A".  
Protection Control Tab  
Universal Relay - Protection Control Tab  
The Protection Control tab is supported for the following devices: B30, C30, C60,  
D60, F30, F35, F60, G60, L60, L90, M60 and T60. The Protection Control tab  
provides the features described below.  
Grouped Protection Settings  
There are eight identical groups of protection settings in the UR - this tab provides an  
enable/disable status indication of selected protection elements, as well as a  
pushbutton to change the enable/disable status of those elements in each group.  
Function availability is determined by the Order Code read from the device – those  
functions that are not available in the connected device will be grayed out and  
disabled, as shown below:  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The label color indicates the  
function’s availability on the  
connected device: gray = not  
available, black = available.  
Button to enable or disable  
the indicated function.  
Status indicator: gray = disabled,  
amber = enabled.  
To use this tab, the user selects one of the eight settings groups for editing using the  
control labeled "Select Settings Group". The status of the settings in the selected  
group will then be displayed, and the user can enable/disable functions without  
affecting settings in the other seven groups. Note that the displayed group may not be  
the active group currently in use by the relay’s protection algorithms. The  
pushbuttons are subject to user level security in Intouch.  
Phase TOC and IOC Settings  
The Phase, Neutral, and Ground buttons in this section may be used to select the  
display of the TOC and IOC values.  
Power System Configuration Tab  
Universal Relay - Power System Configuration Tab  
The Power System Configuration tab supports the B30, C60, D60, F30, F35, F60,  
G60, L60, L90, M60 and T60 UR devices, and shows the source CT and VT  
configuration of the entire relay. The supported UR devices can be configured with  
one to three DSP cards containing voltage and/or current transformers for  
measurement purposes.  
154  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Current Transformers (CT)  
Primary: indicates the current rating of the CT primary.  
Secondary: indicates the output current of the CT secondary, either 1A or 5A.  
Displays "N/A" if the Order Code indicates no CT is installed in the affected  
location.  
Voltage Transformers (VT)  
Secondary: indicates the output voltage of the VT.  
Ratio: the turns ratio of the VT.  
Displays "N/A" if the Order Code indicates no VT is installed in the affected  
location.  
Synchrocheck 1/2 Delta  
The Delta values for Synchrocheck 1 and 2, voltage frequency, and phase.  
IRIG-B Signal Type  
Displays the IRIG-B signal type in use, if applicable.  
Normal Frequency  
The system nominal frequency in hertz.  
Phase Rotation  
The system phase rotation, ABC or ACB.  
Frequency Tracking Reference  
A numerical setpoint value associated with a specific source. The indicated source is  
used by the relay for developing frequency metering information. A value of zero  
indicates that the relay is not intended to meter frequency.  
Hi-Z Function  
Enable or Disable the device's High Impedance (Hi-Z) function, if equipped.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transformer Tab  
Universal Relay - Transformer Tab  
The T60 device alone supports a Transformer Tab on its wizard. This tab is unique to  
the T60 device type. The following values are shown:  
Differential Current  
Phasor magnitude and angle.  
Differential 2nd Harmonic  
Phasor magnitude and angle  
Differential 5th Harmonic  
Phasor magnitude and angle  
Restraint Current  
Phasor Magnitude and angle  
Transformer Winding Reference  
Indicates which of the six possible transformer windings will serve as the reference  
winding.  
156  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Elements Tab  
Universal Relay - Digital Elements Tab  
The Elements tab displays user-defined name and current status of the sixteen digital  
elements in the UR. The status indicator color is amber if an element is enabled, gray  
if it is disabled. The B30, C30, C60, D60, F30, F35, F60, G60, L60, L90, M60 and  
T60 devices are supported.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Counter Tab  
Universal Relay - Digital Counter Tab  
The digital counter tab supports B30, C30, C60, D60, F30, F35, F60, G60, L60, L90,  
M60 and T60 device types, showing information about the eight digital counters  
provided in each UR.  
Status – this indicator is amber if the counter is enabled, gray if disabled.  
Enable/Disable – this button gives the user the ability to enable or disable the  
specified counter.  
Name – displays the user-defined name assigned to the counter.  
Frozen Value – shows the counter’s value when last frozen.  
Time Stamp – shows the time and date when the frozen count was acquired.  
158  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Virtual Inputs Tab  
Universal Relay - Virtual Inputs Tab  
The Virtual Inputs (VInputs) tab allows the user to enable/disable all configured  
virtual inputs in the connected device and provides indication of their status. The 32  
virtual inputs can be manually operated with the pushbuttons provided at the bottom  
of the screen. This tab supports the B30, C30, C60, D60, F30, F35, F60, G60, L60,  
L90, M60 and T60 devices.  
Virtual Inputs  
The enable/disable controls and status indicators are presented as a series of pages.  
To view the virtual inputs, the use the Page arrow keys provided to navigate between  
the pages. The arrow keys are disabled when the virtual inputs are not being  
displayed.  
The state of each virtual input can be controlled with the pushbuttons along the  
bottom of the screen. Clicking one of these buttons toggles the status of the virtual  
input, changing its state as shown in the indicator blocks associated with each button.  
Note that a virtual input must be enabled before the toggling action will take effect in  
the relay.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Virtual Outputs Tab  
Universal Relay - Virtual Outputs Tab  
The Virtual Outputs (VOutput) tab allows the user to view the status (energized/de-  
energized) of all available virtual outputs on the device. The user can also assign a  
textual name to each of the outputs. Up to 64 virtual outputs can be diplayed. This  
tab supports the B30, C30, C60, D60, F30, F35, F60, G60, L60, L90, M60 and T60  
devices.  
Virtual Outputs  
The outputs and their status indicators are presented as a series of pages. To view the  
virtual outputs, the use the Page arrow keys provided to navigate between the pages.  
To assign a name to a virtual output, click in the text field to the right of the output  
number label. The field becomes editable; make any desired changes, then press  
Enter.  
160  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contact Inputs Tab  
Universal Relay - Contact Input Tab  
The Contact Input tab supports the B30, C30, C60, D60, F30, F35, F60, G60, L60,  
L90, M60 and T60 UR devices, and shows the contact inputs installed on the selected  
relay. Up to 96 contact inputs may be displayed.  
Contact Inputs  
The contacts are presented as a series of pages. To view the contact inputs, use the  
Prev(ious) and Next keys provided to navigate among the pages. The number of  
contact inputs available is determined from the Order Code read from the device, and  
is dependent on the number of digital I/O cards installed in the relay. If a contact  
input is not available in the connected relay, the associated control button is grayed  
and disabled, and the input name field shows "N/A". If the corresponding Contact  
Input State is Energized then the LED is lit with an amber color; otherwise the LED  
remains gray (un-energized).  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contact Output Tab  
Universal Relay - Contact Output Tab  
The Contact Output tab supports the B30, C30, C60, D60, F30, F35, F60, G60, L60,  
L90, M60 and T60 UR devices, and shows the contact outputs installed on the  
selected relay. Up to 64 contact outputs may be displayed.  
Contact Output  
The contacts are presented as a series of pages. To view the contact outputs, use the  
Page arrow keys provided to navigate among the pages. The number of contact  
outputs available is determined from the Order Code read from the device, and is  
dependent on the number of digital I/O cards installed in the relay. If a contact output  
is not available in the connected relay, the associated control button is grayed and  
disabled, and the output name field shows "N/A".  
162  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCMA Tab  
Universal Relay - DCMA Tab  
The Direct Current MilliAmperes (DCMA) tab supports the B30, C30, C60, D60,  
F30, F35, F60, G60, L60, L90, M60 and T60 UR devices, and shows the state of the  
relay's DCMA inputs. DCMA inputs are analog inputs used to read external  
transducer values. An example might be rotational speed on a generator, translated  
into a 4-20 mA current loop. Up to 24 inputs may be enabled or disabled.  
DCMA Inputs  
The DCMA inputs and their parameters are presented as a series of pages. To view  
the inputs, the use the Page arrow keys provided to navigate between the pages.  
For each DCMA input, its ID number, value, and units are displayed as read from the  
device. To enable or disable a selected input, click the Enable button next to its ID  
number.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Source Tabs  
Universal Relay - Source Tab Example  
Similar in operation to the metering tab (except that frequency information is not  
displayed), there are five identical "Source" tabs (2 – 6) which display actual values  
information specific to the indicated source. There is no "Source 1" tab, since the  
Metering tab serves as the "Source 1" display. The B30, C60, D60, F30, F35, F60,  
G60, L60, L90, M60 and T60 UR device types are supported.  
The display rules for the metering tab also apply to each Source tab.  
164  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Demand Tab  
Universal Relay - Demand Tab  
The Demand tab supports the B30, C60, D60, F30, F35, F60, G60, L60, L90, M60  
and T60 UR devices, and shows a variety of energy measurements and demand  
parameters for a selected source.  
These values are displayed for up to six sources, which may be toggled between  
using the S1 - S6 buttons. The Clear Demand button clears the values for the selected  
source. Note: Energy data is displayed as N/A for the L90 and L60 device types, and  
data logger data is displayed as N/A for the B30 device type.  
Demand Values  
The Demand panel shows the Data Logger parameters, which may be cleared using  
the Clear Data Logger button, the time/date stamps of the oldest and newest samples  
available, and information on the Demand Current and Demand Power Methods, and  
Demand Interval (if applicable).  
Source (x) Energy  
Displays positive and negative Watthour and Varhour values for the selected source.  
Source (x) Demand, Peak Demand, Peak Demand Date  
Displays Demand, Peak Demand, and Peak Demand Date values for a variety of  
measurements for the selected source.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Line Tab  
Universal Relay - Line Tab  
The Line tab supports the D60, F30, F60, G60, L60, L90 and UR devices, and shows  
a variety of energy measurements and demand parameters for a selected source.  
These values are displayed for up to six sources, which may be toggled between  
using the S1 - S6 buttons. The Clear Demand button clears the values for the selected  
source.  
Line Tab  
Displays (for Remote 1, Remote 2, Local, and Differential) the magnitude and angle  
on phase A, B, and C.  
Also displays information on various Direct Inputs, L90 Channels 1 and 2, and Line  
Position and Line Zero values.  
Control Functions  
The Control Functions panel displays status (enabled/disabled) and allows control of  
various relay elements, for example 87L and 87PC protection elements. Elements are  
greyed out if not installed or applicable to the device type. Each element's may be  
enabled or disabled by clicking the button next to its name.  
166  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Breaker Tab  
Universal Relay - Breaker Tab  
The Breaker tab supports the B30, C30, C60, D60, F30, F35, F60, G60, L60, L90,  
M60 and T60 UR devices, and shows a variety amperage measurements and breaker  
status, as well as allowing control of breaker functions and auto reclosers.  
Arcing  
Amperage at Breaker 1 and 2 is displayed for Phases A, B, and C. The Clear Current  
Arcing functions allow current arcing conditions to be cleared.  
Breaker Arcing Current features are available for Breakers 1 and 2. This element  
calculates an estimate of the per-phase wear on the breaker contacts by measuring  
and integrating the current squared passing through the breaker contacts as an arc.  
These per-phase values are added to accumulated totals for each phase and compared  
to a programmed threshold value. When the threshold is exceeded in any phase, the  
relay can set an output operand to "1". The accumulated value for each phase can be  
displayed as an actual value.  
Breaker Functions  
Breaker control can be enabled or disabled using these controls, and the Breaker  
Arcing Amp function can be enabled or disabled for Breakers 1 and 2. These controls  
will be disabled if the connected device does not support breaker control.  
Breaker Status  
Selecting a settings group changes the display of functions. Up to 8 settings groups  
are available for display.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Reclose  
If the breaker is so equipped, the status of and reclose count for up to six Auto  
Reclose functions can be displayed, and each recloser may be enabled or disabled.  
Click the button next to each ID number to enable/disable the autorecloser.  
Contact Output Current States Tab  
Universal Relay - Contact Output Current States Tab  
The Contact Output Current State tab supports the B30, C30, C60, D60, F30, F35,  
F60, G60, L60, L90, M60 and T60 UR devices, and indicates the current state of the  
contact outputs installed on the selected relay. Up to 64 contact outputs may be  
displayed.  
Contact Output Current State  
The Current, Voltage, and Detect buttons enable the user to shift the viewing mode of  
the contacts displayed.  
The contacts are presented as a series of pages. To view the contact outputs, use the  
Page arrow keys provided to navigate among the pages. The number of contact  
outputs available is determined from the Order Code read from the device, and is  
dependent on the number of digital I/O cards installed in the relay. If a contact output  
is not available in the connected relay, the associated control button is grayed and  
disabled, and the output name field shows "N/A".  
168  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Temperature Detection Tab  
Universal Relay - Contact Output Tab  
The RTD tab supports the B30, C30, C60, D60, F30, F35, F60, G60, L60, L90, M60  
and T60 UR devices, and shows the RTD sensors installed on the selected relay. Up  
to 48 input sensors may be displayed.  
RTD Tab  
Each RTD sensor's status, function (name), and current temperature are shown.  
Individual RTD's may be disabled or enabled using the control button next to the  
RTD number.  
The sensors are presented as a series of pages. To view each page of RTD's, use the  
Prev(ious) and Next keys provided to navigate among the pages. The number of  
parameters displayed is determined from the Order Code read from the device, and is  
dependent on the number of RTD sensors wired to the relay. If a sensor is not  
available in the connected relay, the associated control button is grayed and disabled,  
and the name field shows "N/A".  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bus Tab  
Universal Relay - Bus Tab  
The Bus tab is supported for the B30 UR device only. It displays Phase Magnitude  
and Angle measurements on Bus 1 and Bus 2 for phases A, B, and C.  
Current direction is shown in degrees for each phase, and the Zone function can be  
enabled or disabled on each Bus.  
170  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
239 Motor Protection Relay  
The 239 does not support Waveform Capture or Event generation, therefore these  
buttons are disabled beneath the Info box.  
The 239 Tabular Data Screen’s command buttons are described below:  
Tab  
Button  
Function  
Metering  
Reset Device  
External Restart  
Clear Trip Data  
Issues a RESET command to the 239  
Issues an External Restart command to the 239  
Trip Data  
Clears the last 5 trip causes from the 239’s  
memory  
Table 23. 239 Tabular data screen commands.  
The Status tab displays 35 Pickup LEDs (amber) and 35 Alarm LEDs  
(red), along with a text string for each alarm condition on the Status tab.  
See the 239 Motor Protection Relay Instruction Manual (Chapter 5, Actual Values)  
for information on the display of data values under different device configurations.  
Values not configured for use are displayed as N/A.  
Metering tab  
The Multilin 239 Metering screen shows:  
Current  
RTD Status and Temperature  
Motor Status  
Switches  
Output Relays  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Reset Device button, when clicked, will issue a RESET command to the 239.  
The Emergency Restart button, when clicked, will issue a RESTART command to the 239.  
Status Tab  
The Status tab displays Alarm, Trip, Auxilary Status Pickup is shown in Amber color and Active Alarm shown in  
Red, along with a text string for each alarm condition.  
See the 239 Motor Protection Relay Instruction Manual (Chapter 5, Actual Values) for information on the display of  
data values under different device configurations. Values not configured for use are displayed as N/A.  
172  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trip Data  
The Multilin 239 Last Trip Data screen shows:  
Cause of Last Trip and their corresponding currents and RTD Temperatures at the time of trip.  
Trip Record  
The Clear Trip Data button, when clicked, will clear all the trip data.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setpoints Tab  
The Multilin 239 System Setpoints screen shows:  
CT Inputs  
Motor Data  
Phase Current Overload  
Breaker Failure  
Immediate Overload  
Mechanical Jam  
174  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
269 Plus Motor Management Relay  
The 269 Tabular Data Screen wizard provides two reset push buttons on the Setup 6  
tab.  
Tab  
Status 6  
Button  
Function  
Clear Last RTD Data  
Clears the RTD last access registers  
Clears the commissioning data registers  
Clear Commissioning  
Data  
Table 24. 269+ Tabular data screen commands.  
For complete explanations of parameters, refer to the 269+ Users Guide.  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
369 Motor Management Relay  
Metering Tab  
369 - Metering Data Screen  
The Metering tab displays the following metered values from the 369 device: Actual  
Values for Voltage, Current, Power, Power Factor, and Frequency. These values are  
detailed below.  
Current  
Per phase magnitude and angle  
Phase average  
Ground current  
Motor Load as a percentage of the Full Load Current rating defined in setpoints.  
Thermal Capacity used in percent  
Estimated time to trip  
Current Unbalance ratio  
Voltage  
Voltage values are only displayed if the Metering or Backspin option is installed in  
the relay, and if a voltage transformer (VT) connection has been programmed in the  
relay.  
Line - Line voltage magnitude.  
Average Line-Line voltage.  
Line – Neutral voltage magnitude and angle (only shown for wye configurations)  
176  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Average Line-Neutral voltage. (only shown for wye configurations)  
Power  
Power values are displayed only if the Metering or Backspin option is installed in the  
relay and a VT connection has been programmed.  
Real power  
Reactive power  
Apparent power  
Power Factor  
Motor Status  
The current status of the motor is shown in a colored indicator block  
Timer Functions & Learned Values  
The lower right quadrant of the metering tab has two pages – Timer Functions and  
Learned Values. You can toggle between these two displays by clicking on the button  
located in the bottom right corner of the metering tab display.  
Timer Functions: this section displays the current values of several internal timers  
within the device. Most of these functions must be programmed in the relay in order  
to function. Refer to the device manual for specific usage details.  
Learned Values: this section displays items tracked by the relay. For full details on  
their usage, consult the relay manual.  
Backspin features – these are only enabled when the Backspin option is installed in  
the relay.  
Learned cool time constants – these are enabled only if the "Enable Learned Cool  
Times" feature is programmed.  
Learned k factor is only enabled by setting the unbalance biasing of thermal capacity  
to on/learned.  
Clearing Motor Data (see control tab) will set all these values to their defaults.  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alarms Tab  
369 Relay - Alarms Tab  
The Alarms tab consists of three pages – Status, Trip Data, and Trip Counters. You  
can navigate between pages by clicking the buttons located along the lower edge of  
the tab display.  
Alarm Status  
This page displays the current status of the alarm functions within the relay.  
If a function is disabled or not programmed, its label appears as dark gray text, and  
its associated indicator will be dark gray at all times.  
If a function is enabled, its label appears as black text, and its indicator will show the  
current status of that function.  
Trip Data  
This page displays information about the last trip event.  
Voltage, power, and power factor values are only indicated if the Metering or  
Backspin option is installed and a VT connection has been programmed in the relay.  
Line-Neutral voltages are only displayed when the VT is connected in a wye  
configuration.  
The Hottest Stator RTD field is only shown if a Stator RTD is programmed.  
Trip Counters  
This page displays information about the accumulated trips experienced by the relay.  
Data on this page can be cleared using the Clear Last Trip Data button on the Control  
tab.  
178  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Demand Tab  
369 Relay - Demand Tab  
This tab displays current and power demand metering information.  
Current demand is indicated regardless of options/VT settings.  
Power demand values are only available when the Metering or Backspin option is  
installed on the relay and a VT connection is programmed.  
Peak demand values may be cleared using the Clear Peak Demand Data button on the  
Control tab.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Local RTD Tab  
369 Relay - Local RTD Tab  
This tab displays information about any RTD temperature probes connected directly  
to the device. Information on this tab is only available if the RTD option is installed  
in the relay.  
Information and alarm indication for each RTD is only available when that RTD is  
programmed for operation. If an RTD’s Application is set to "none" then all fields for  
that RTD display "N/A".  
The hottest Stator RTD indicates which RTD is currently returning the highest  
temperature. This condition is indicated by red text in the Temperature field.  
Only one alarm condition can be displayed at a time – highest priority alarms are  
displayed in the alarm indicator. For example, if a "High Alarm" was triggered and  
latched and the RTD value returned to the "Alarm Active" state, the "High Alarm"  
latched indicator would persist.  
180  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote RTD Tab  
369 Relay - Remote RTD Tab  
This tab displays information about any RTD temperature probes connected to one or  
more Remote RTD units. These external accessories connect via Modbus to the 369  
relay. A maximum of four RRTD modules can be connected to a 369 relay – each  
module is assigned a page on this tab. Use the RRTD Selection buttons in the lower  
left corner of the tab to navigate between pages. Information on this tab is only  
available if an RRTD module is connected to the relay.  
Information and alarm indication for each RTD is only available when that RTD is  
programmed for operation. If an RTD’s Application is set to "none" then all fields for  
that RTD display "N/A".  
The hottest Stator RTD indicates which RTD is currently returning the highest  
temperature. This condition is indicated by red text in the Temperature field.  
Only one alarm condition can be displayed at a time – highest priority alarms are  
displayed in the alarm indicator. For example, if a "High Alarm" was triggered and  
latched and the RTD value returned to the "Alarm Active" state, the "High Alarm"  
latched indicator would persist.  
The Status indicators are dedicated to the indicated RRTD module, except for the  
Comm. Failure indicator – this will be energized if any configured RRTD module  
stops communicating.  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control Tab  
369 Relay - Control Tab  
This tab provides limited control functionality over Modbus.  
Status – indicates the current status of the output relays and general digital inputs.  
Preset Values – shows the current value of the indicated field. Note that these values  
are only updated when the tab is first displayed – not continuously. To preset a new  
value, click the white box containing the value you want to change. The Intouch  
Calculator window appears – type in the new value and click OK. The new value is  
now displayed in the Control tab, but has not yet been sent to the device. Click the  
Set button to store the new value in the device.  
Control – These buttons are disabled unless the Serial Communications Control  
setpoint in the relay is programmed to "On". These buttons are subject to Intouch  
user level security. The security level is set during wizard configuration.  
Clear Data – These buttons clear the designated values within the device. All buttons  
are subject to Intouch user level security which is set during wizard configuration.  
182  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup Tab  
369 Relay - Setup Tab  
This tab displays selected setpoints from the device. All fields on this tab are read-  
only. Setpoints may be changed via the relay’s own setup program or manually via  
the front panel.  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SR469 Motor Management Relay  
All six function buttons under the Info area are enabled for the SR469.  
The SR469 Tabular Data Screen wizard has nine command buttons, described below.  
Tab  
Button  
Function  
Metering  
Reset Device  
Issues a RESET command to the SR469  
Clears these values from the SR469’s memory  
Clears this data from memory  
Clear MWh and Mvarh  
Clear Peak Demand  
Motor Start/Motor Stop  
Clear RTD Maximums  
Clear Last Trip Data  
Status  
Issues Motor Start or Motor Stop commands  
Resets the RTD Maximums data  
Clears this data from memory  
Trip  
I/O  
Clear Analog Input  
Min/Max Data  
Clears this data from memory  
Maintenance  
Preset Digital Counter  
Clear Trip Counters  
Allows presetting of digital counters.  
Clears the trip count data from memory.  
Table 25. SR469 Tabular data screen commands.  
See the SR469 Motor Management Relay manual (Chapter 5, Actual Values) for  
information on the display of data values under different device configurations.  
Values not configured for use are displayed as N/A.  
Metering Tab  
The Multilin SR469 Metering Values screen shows the metering values, for example, Amps A, Amps B and Amps C; and  
184  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Volts AB, Volts BC and Volts CA. Also shows Power, Energy, Motor Data and RTD information.  
The Clear Peak Demand button will clear all Peak Demand data  
The Clear MWh & Mvarh button will clear all MWh and Mvarh values.  
The RESET Device button will issue a RESET command to the SR469.  
Status Tab  
The Multilin SR469 Status screen shows:  
Start Blocks  
Motor Status  
Real Time Clock  
RTD Maximums  
The Clear RTD Maximums button will clear all maximum RTD values.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alarms Tab  
The Multilin SR469 Alarm Status screen shows the status of various alarms such as Overload Alarm and Underpower  
Alarm.  
186  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trip Tab  
The Multilin SR469 Trip screen shows the values of last trip data.  
The Clear Last Trip Data button will clear all values of the last trip data.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IO Tab  
The Multilin SR469 Inputs & Outputs screen shows values related to:  
Output Relays  
Digital Input Switches  
Analog Inputs  
The Clear Analog I/P Min/Max button will clear all minimum and maximum values of Analog I/P.  
188  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Tab  
The Multilin SR469 Maintenance screen shows values related to:  
Trip Counters  
Timers  
General Counters  
The Clear Trip Counters button will clear all values of trip counters and the Preset Digital Ctr will preset trip counters.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Tab  
The Multilin SR469 Analog Input Differential screen shows:  
Analog Input Diff 1-2  
Analog Input Diff 3-4  
190  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RTD HI Tab  
The Multilin SR469 HI Alarm Status screen shows various RTD values.  
Setpoints Tab  
The Multilin SR469 System Setpoints screen shows values of Thermal Model, Current, Voltage Sensing, Power System  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SR489 Generator Management Relay  
All the SR489’s function buttons below the Info box are enabled.  
The SR489 Tabular Data Screen wizard has nine command buttons, described below.  
Tab  
Button  
Function  
Metering  
Reset Device  
Issues a RESET command to the device.  
Clear Peak Demand  
Clears the peak demand data from memory.  
Clears the MWh and Mvarh data from memory.  
Clears the maximum RTD data from memory.  
Clears the last trip data from memory.  
Clear MWh and Mvarh  
Clear Max RTD Data  
Trip Data  
I/O  
Clear Last Trip Data  
Clear Analog I/P Min/Max Data  
Clear Trip Counters  
Clears the analog input minimum/maximum data from memory.  
Clears the trip counter data from memory.  
Clears the generator data from memory.  
Maintenance  
Clear Generator Information  
Clear Breaker Information  
Clears the breaker data from memory.  
Table 26. SR489 Tabular data screen commands.  
See the SR489 Generator Management Relay manual (Chapter 5, Actual Values) for  
information on the display of data values under different device configurations.  
Values not configured for use are displayed as N/A.  
Metering Tab  
The Multilin SR489 Metering Values screen shows various metering values:  
Current  
Voltage  
192  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Demand  
Power  
RTD Information  
Motor Data  
The Clear Peak Demand button clears all peak demand values.  
The Clear MWh & Mvarh button clears all MWh and Mvarh data  
The Clear Max RTD Data button clears the maximum RTD data and  
The RESET Device button will issue a RESET command to the device.  
Pickup Tab  
The Multilin SR489 Pickups screen shows:  
Phase Differential Trip  
Overvoltage Trip  
Volts/Hertz Trip  
CLICK MORE BUTTON TO SEE MORE PICKUPS  
Alarms Tab  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Multilin SR489 Alarm Pickups screen shows all the Alarms.  
Trip Data Tab  
The Multilin SR489 Last Trip Data screen shows the values of last trip data and the corresponding values at the time of  
trip.  
The Clear Last Trip Data button clears all values of the last trip data.  
194  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IO Tab  
The Multilin SR489 Inputs & Outputs screen shows:  
Digital Input Switches  
Analog Inputs  
Output Relays  
Learned Data Values  
The Clear Analog I/P Min/Max button clears all the minimum and maximum analog I/P.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Tab  
The Multilin SR489 Maintenance screen shows:  
General Timers & Counters  
Trip Counters  
The Clear Trip Counters button will clear all values of trip counters; the Clear General Info button will clear all general  
information; and the Clear Breaker Info button will clear all breaker information from the memory.  
196  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setpoints Tab  
The Multilin SR489 System Setpoints screen shows various values related to the setpoints such as Phase CT Primary,  
Ground CT Type, VT Connection Type, Voltage Transformer Ratio etc.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
565 Feeder Management Relay  
The 565 Tabular Data Screen wizard has the following buttons on the Command tab:  
Tab  
Button  
Function  
Command  
Maint Data  
Clears the maintenance data  
Clears the operation data  
Clears the amp demand registers  
Clears the kW demand registers  
Clears the kVAR demand registers  
Clears the events table  
Operation Data  
Amp Demand  
KW Demand  
KVAR Demand  
Events  
Energy  
Clears the energy used data  
Performs a keypad reset  
Ends the relay test  
Reset Keypad  
End of Relay Test  
End of LED Test  
End of Analog Output Test  
Test LCD Display  
Test LEDs  
Ends the LED test  
Ends the analog output test  
Sends a test pattern to the LCD  
Starts the LED test  
Table 27. 565 Tabular data screen commands.  
The Setup 2 tab has two data input areas. Analog Input Title creates a user label for  
the analog input used in the device. Analog Input Units performs the same function  
for the units of the analog input. These labels appear on the Metering tab and on the  
Large Faceplate wizard when the analog input is displayed. The analog input can be  
198  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
scaled to display any desired units from the front of the device, but these labels are  
not sent to the DDE Server.  
For complete explanations of parameters, refer to the 565 Users Guide.  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
735 Feeder Relay  
The Events and Wave function buttons below the Info box are disabled since the 735  
does not support Waveform Capture or Event generation.  
The 735 Tabular Data Screen wizard has two command buttons, described below.  
Tab  
Button  
Function  
Metering  
Trip  
Reset Device  
Clear Last Trip Data  
Issues a RESET command to the 735  
Clears the trip causes log  
Table 28. 735 Tabular data screen commands.  
Metering Tab  
The 735 Metering screen shows:  
Current and Output Relays  
Time Overcurrent Trip and Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip  
Configuration  
The RESET/CLEAR Device button will issue a RESET command to 735.  
200  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trip Data Tab  
The 735 Trip Data screen shows trip data information such as:  
Last Trip Data  
Trip Record  
The Clear Last 5 Trip Causes button will clear values of last 5 trip causes.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setpoints Tab  
The 735 System Setpoints screen shows setpoints information such as:  
Dial Settings  
Option Switches  
202  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SR745 Transformer Management Relay  
Under the Info area, the SR745’s function buttons are all enabled.  
The SR745 Tabular Data Screen wizard has three command buttons:  
Tab  
Button  
Function  
Metering  
Demand  
Reset Device  
Issues a RESET command to the device  
Clear Max  
Demand Data  
Clears the maximum demand data from the  
SR745’s memory  
Harmonics  
Clear Loss-of-Life  
Data  
Clears loss-of-life data from the SR745’s  
memory  
Table 29. SR745 Tabular data screen commands.  
See the SR745 Transformer Management Relay Instruction Manual (Chapter 6,  
Actual Values) for information on the display of data values under different device  
configurations. Values not configured for use are displayed as N/A. When configured  
for only 2 Windings, the Winding 3 fields on the Tabular Data wizard are not visible.  
Metering Tab  
The Multilin SR745 Metering Values screen shows:  
Current  
Sequence Current  
Status Flags  
The RESET Device button will issue a RESET command to the device.  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flags Tab  
The Multilin SR745 Element Flags screen shows the state and phases of various elements.  
IO Tab  
The Multilin SR745 Inputs & Outputs screen shows:  
204  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Logic Inputs  
Virtual Inputs  
Output Relays  
Virtual Outputs  
Analog Input  
Demand Tab  
The Multilin SR745 Demand Data screen shows:  
Configuration  
Present Values  
Maximums  
The Clear Max Demand Data button will clear all maximum values of the demand data.  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Harmonic Tab  
The Multilin SR745 Harmonic & Misc Data screen shows:  
Harmonic Data  
Misc  
The Reset Loss of Life button will clear loss-of-life data from the SR745’s memory.  
206  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setpoints Tab  
The Multilin SR745 System Setpoints screen shows information such as Nominal Phase to Phase Voltage, Rated Load  
(MVA), Transformer Type and Analog Outputs.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power Tab  
The Multilin SR745 Power & Energy screen shows:  
Power  
Energy  
Aging Factor  
Tap Changer  
208  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SR750/760 Feeder Management Relay  
The SR750 and SR760 are very similar devices and share a common Tabular Data  
Screen wizard. During wizard configuration, select which type of device the wizard  
represents (SR750 or SR760) by selecting the corresponding radio button in the  
Tabular Data Screen Configuration dialog box.  
Under the Info area, the SR750/760’s function buttons are all enabled.  
The SR750/760 Tabular Data Screen wizard has eight command buttons:  
Tab  
Button  
Function  
Metering  
Clear Energy  
Reset Device  
Reset Max Demand  
Resets the energy counters to zero.  
Issues a RESET command to the SR750/760.  
Demand  
Clears the Max Demand data from the  
SR750/760’s memory.  
Trip  
I/O  
Reset Trip Counters  
Open Breaker  
Close Breaker  
Reset Count  
Resets the SR750/760’s trip counters to zero.  
Issues Open Breaker command.  
Issues Close Breaker command.  
Resets the SR750/760's reclosure counter to  
zero.  
Fault  
Reset Arcing  
Current  
Resets the arcing current data.  
Table 30. SR750/760 Tabular data screen commands.  
The SR750/760 Tabular screen offers a tab labeled LOGIC. This tab allows you to  
access the SR750/760's 20 logic inputs. You can use these logic inputs to operate a  
variety of logic functions for circuit breaker control, external trips, blocking of  
protection elements, etc., and use the PCMS Wizard to monitor the status of the logic  
inputs. For more information, refer to the SR750 or SR760 user manual, in the  
section titled Setpoints - S3 Logic Inputs.  
The SR750/SR760 Tabular Data Screen Wizard supports the Lockout/Tagout wizard.  
Please refer to the section titled Using and Configuring PMCS Wizards:  
Lockout/Tagout Wizard for details.  
If a Danger or Ground Lockout/Tagout symbol is installed on this wizard, attempts to  
issue a Breaker Open or Breaker Close command will generate an error message.  
See the SR750/760 Feeder Management Relay Instruction Manual (Chapter 5, Actual  
Values) for information on the display of data values under different device  
configurations. Values not configured for use are displayed as N/A.  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Metering Tab  
The SR750/760 Metering screen shows:  
Current  
Energy  
Voltage  
Power  
The Clear Energy Data button will clear all values of energy data. The RESET Device button will issue a RESET  
command to the device.  
210  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Tab  
The SR750/760 Status screen shows Active Conditions.  
Fault Tab  
The SR750/760 Fault & Maintenance Data screen shows:  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fault Locations  
Total Arcing Current  
The Reset Arcing Current button will reset all values of the arcing current.  
Trip Tab  
The SR750/760 Trip Data screen shows:  
Last Trip Data  
Trip Counters  
The Reset Trip Counters button will reset all values of the trip counters.  
212  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Demand Tab  
The SR750/760 Demand screen shows details of:  
Configuration  
Values  
The Reset Max Demand button will reset all maximum values of demand.  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Logic Tab  
The SR750/760 Logic screen shows:  
Contact Inputs  
Virtual Inputs  
Logic Input States  
IO Tab  
The SR750/760 Inputs & Outputs screen shows:  
214  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Relays  
Analog Input  
Hardware Input Coils  
Breaker Operation  
The Open Breaker button will issue an Open Breaker command. The Close Breaker button will issue a Close Breaker  
command.  
Setpoints Tab  
The SR750/760 System Setpoints screen shows:  
System Setup  
Analog Output Configuration  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fanuc 90/30  
The Fanuc 90/30 Tabular Data Screen wizard is blank. This allows any desired data  
to be placed on the screen.  
Fanuc 90/70  
The Fanuc 90/70 Tabular Data Screen wizard is blank. This allows any desired data  
to be placed on the screen.  
216  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fanuc Micro 90  
The GE Fanuc Micro 90 Tabular Data Screen is blank. This allows for any desired  
data to be placed on the screen.  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MX200  
The MX 200 device is an Automatic Transfer Switch. The Tabular Data Screen wizard has several special features. You  
can use the Setup screen to change the meter configuration. Values displayed in white boxes are changeable. Clicking on  
the displayed value changes some, while clicking on the box changes others. The Download and Refresh buttons on the  
setup screen upload and download all of the setpoints from the device.  
To change setpoints at the device, first press the refresh button to upload current setpoint values from the device  
(otherwise the defaults are shown and used for download). Modify setpoints as desired then press the download button  
to send all setpoints to the unit. In the following pages, each of the MX 200 Meter’s Tabular Data Screen Wizards’ tabs  
will be displayed and detailed.  
Metering Tab  
The Metering tab displays the following metered values from the MX 200 device.  
218  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voltages  
Normal and Emergency Voltage values for all the phases.  
Timer Functions  
Timer Active  
Timer Countdown Value  
Time on Emergency  
No. of Transfers  
Nominal FS Vol. Value  
ATS Mode  
Fault Present  
Exerciser Enabled  
Load Test Running  
Load, No Load, Fast Load Status  
Communications  
MX-200 – Modcard – Communication Status  
Displays communication status, for example, Comm OK  
Status  
Q3 Input  
Auxiliary 2 Input  
Auxiliary 1 Input  
Automatic Transfer Relay  
SN Limit Switch  
SE Limit Switch  
SNO Limit Switch  
SEO Limit Switch  
S5 Selector  
S12 Selector  
Load Shed Input  
Q7 Input  
The status is either ON or OFF. If the relay is ON, the status is displayed in green and if relay is OFF, it is displayed in  
red.  
Others  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The tab shows frequency and number of phases on source:  
Position Status  
Phase Rotation  
The status for Source is displayed as Available (displayed in green) or Not Available (displayed in red). The Position  
Status is displayed as Normal (displayed in green) or Emergency (displayed in red). The Phase Rotation is displayed as  
ON (displayed in green) or OFF (displayed in red).  
Setup Tab  
The Setup tab displays the following demand values from MX 200 device.  
220  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control  
YE  
YN  
No Load Test  
Load Test  
Fast Load Test  
S5  
S12  
LS  
Q7  
Q3  
Aux2  
Aux1  
The legend is ON and OFF. If ON, it is indicated by amber and if OFF by gray color.  
Options  
T3 Timer Bypass  
T3 Timer  
W3 Timer Bypass  
W3 Timer  
T Timer Bypass  
W Timer Bypass  
In Ph. Mon/Closed Trans  
ATS Type  
S12 Auto/Manual  
S5 Auto/Manual Bypass  
Phase Sequence Check  
Emg Over Frequency  
Emg Over Voltage  
Normal Over Frequency  
Normal Under Frequency  
Normal Over Voltage  
The value against each option is displayed as either as Confirmed or Not Confirmed.  
Voltage (Volts)  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Normal Pickup  
Normal Dropout  
Emer Pickup  
Emer Dropout  
The user can enter values against each parameter.  
Frequency (Hz)  
Normal Pickup  
Emer Pickup  
The user can enter values against each parameter.  
Time (Seconds)  
P Time  
W Time  
W3 Time  
DW Time  
T Time  
T3 Time  
DT Time  
U Time  
The Setup tab also provides push buttons for performing the following commands:  
Download – Executes a script to check for values that have changed and downloads those values to the device  
Refresh – Executes a script to upload all of the meter values for the settings on the screen.  
Note: Be sure to click the Refresh button prior to changing or downloading any settings to the MX 200, as the latest  
settings may not be displayed.  
222  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GEN PLC  
The Generator Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) is a specially programmed PLC with specific number of I/O  
modules, controlled by a Master PLC program up to maximum number of 16 Generators.  
GEN PLC Tabular wizard mainly have 3 tabs as described below.  
Master Tab  
The Master PLC lists 16 generators displaying status for each generator separately. The status types are:  
Run/Stop  
Alarm  
Shutdown  
Runtime (in hours)  
Lead Value  
If a particular generator is stopped, it is displayed in gray color; if a generator is running, in green; if there is an alarm, in  
amber; and shutdown of a generator in red.  
The parameters of generators are:  
Engine Crank Time (In seconds)  
No. of Cranks  
Cool Down Time (In seconds)  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Generator Tab  
This tab displays generator parameters for 16 generators represented as G1 to G16 (buttons). When a button is clicked,  
the parameters of that generator are displayed on the screen. The parameters are:  
Status  
Gen Brkr Aux Contact  
Breaker Close Ready  
Not in Auto  
CPU Running  
Engine in Cooldown  
Engine Run Contact  
If a generator is running, the status is displayed in gray and if it is Status Stop, it is displayed as green. The status Not In  
Auto is displayed in red.  
Alarm  
Undervoltage  
Hi Water Temp Warn  
Battery Charger Failure  
Low Fuel Day Tank  
Oil Pressure Warning  
Low Water Temp  
Low Water Level  
Day Tank Critically – Low Fuel Level  
Day Tank Hi Fuel Level  
Day Tank Fuel Leak  
Summary Alarm  
224  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Any alarm in generator’s status is displayed in amber. Otherwise the status is displayed in gray.  
Shutdown  
Overcrank  
Overspeed  
High Water Temp  
Oil Pressure  
Overvoltage  
Reverse Power  
Breaker Locked Out  
Fail to Synchronize  
General Failure  
Emergency Stop  
EMCP Diagnostic Failure  
Gen Set Breaker  
Air Damper Switch  
Lock Out 489 Relay  
Fail Safe 489 Relay  
Note: Any kind of shutdown is displayed in red.  
PSG  
The screen shows Paralleling SwitchGear Status of generators.  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status  
Latched Under Frequency  
Latched Over Frequency  
Communication Failure  
Main Tank Low Fuel Level  
Main Tank Critical Low Fuel Level  
Main Tank High Fuel Level  
Main Tank Fuel Leaked  
Load Bank Breaker Bell Alarm  
System Not in Auto  
System Under Test  
Remote Start Signal Received  
System in Load Demand Mode  
System Test With Load Bank  
Remote Peak Shave Signal Received  
Load Add Priority  
Load Add Priority 3  
Load Add Priority 4  
Load Shed Priority 2  
Load Shed Priority 3  
Load Shed Priority 4  
Note: Any alarm is displayed in amber, otherwise normal status is shown in gray color.  
226  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPM5300P  
This device belongs to Electro Industries family, which is tightly integrated device in to PMCS product. This device  
contains the following tabs.  
Metering Tab  
The screen explains various parameters of the device:  
Current (Amps)  
Phase (A, B, C and Neutral)  
Inst  
Max  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voltage (Volts)  
Phase (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC and CA)  
Inst  
THD Current  
THD Voltage  
Energy  
WATT Hour  
VA Hour  
VAR Hour  
Power  
Real (WATT)  
Reactive (VAR)  
Apparent (VA)  
PF  
228  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup One Tab  
The screen explains various parameters in relation with Relay 1 and Relay 2 such as:  
Configuration  
Kilo Volt Inputs  
Kilo Amp Input  
Mega Watt Input  
Phase Reverse Limits  
Meter Setup  
Limits Set By  
Relay 1 / Relay 2  
Phase Reversal  
Phase Imbalance  
Delay On  
Delay Off  
Decimal Placement  
Volts Decimal Placement  
Amps Decimal Placement  
WATT Decimal Placement  
VOLTS Full Scale  
AMPS Full Scale  
Lim. Threshold for lmb (%)  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reset  
WATT Hour  
VAR Hour  
VA Hour  
If it is kilo volt inputs, the decimal placement is 2 (as shown in the screen); if kilo amp input the decimal placement is 3  
and if mega watt input, it is 1.  
Note: Configured is displayed in green, Enabled in red and Reset in Amber.  
Setup Two Tab  
The screen explains various parameters related to Limits and Triggers:  
Brief explanation of each of the columns is described below  
Column  
Description  
Limit 1  
Trigger - Relay 1  
Limit 1 value for the Associated quantity (For example: Phase A Amps)  
LED display in Amber color : Limit 1 of the associated value will trigger Relay 1.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 1 of the associated value will not trigger Relay 1.  
LED display in Amber color : Limit 1 of the associated value will trigger Relay 2.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 1 of the associated value will not trigger Relay 2.  
Limit 2 value for the Associated quantity (For example: Phase A Amps)  
LED display in Amber color : Limit 2 of the associated value will trigger Relay 1.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 2 of the associated value will not trigger Relay 1.  
LED display in Amber color : Limit 2 of the associated value will trigger Relay 2.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 2 of the associated value will not trigger Relay 2.  
LED display in RED color : Limit 1 of the associated value is Set for Above.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 1 of the associated value is Set for Below.  
LED display in RED color : Limit 2 of the associated value is Set for Above.  
Trigger - Relay 2  
Limit 2  
Trigger - Relay 1  
Trigger - Relay 2  
Set Above/Below Limit 1  
Set Above/Below Limit 2  
230  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 2 of the associated value is Set for Below.  
LED display in GREEN color : The associated quantity is exceeded the Limit 1 value.  
LED display in Gray color: The associated quantity is NOT exceeded the Limit 1 value.  
LED display in GREEN color : The associated quantity is exceeded the Limit 2 value.  
LED display in Gray color: The associated quantity is NOT exceeded the Limit 2 value.  
Exceeded Limit 1  
Exceeded Limit 2  
Example 1  
Example 2  
Limit1 is Set for Above  
Limit 1 is 100 Amps  
Limit 2 is Set for Below  
Limit 2 is 80 Amps  
The associated Quantity is Phase A Instantaneous value is  
397 Amps  
The associated Quantity is Phase A Instantaneous value is  
50 Amps  
Exceeded Limit 1 will show in GREEN color as 397>100  
Exceeded Limit 1 will show in GREEN color as 50<80  
Current  
Phase A  
Phase B  
Phase C  
Neutral  
Voltage  
AN  
BN  
CN  
AB  
BC  
CA  
Power  
VA  
VAR  
WATT  
PF  
Frequency  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPM5200P  
This device belongs to Electro Industries family, which is tightly integrated device in to PMCS product. This device  
contains the following tabs.  
Metering Tab  
The screen explains various parameters of the device:  
Current (Amps)  
Phase (A, B, C, Neutral)  
Inst  
Max  
232  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voltage (Volts)  
Phase (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC, CA)  
Inst  
THD Current/THD Voltage  
Displays Phase A, Phase B and Phase C THD Current and Voltage values.  
Energy  
WATT Hour  
VA Hour  
VAR Hour  
Power  
Real (WATT)  
Reactive (VAR)  
Apparent (VA)  
PF  
Setup One Tab  
The screen explains various parameters in relation with Relay 1 and Relay 2 such as:  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Kilo Volt Inputs  
Kilo Amp Input  
Mega Watt Input  
Phase Reverse Limits  
Meter Setup  
Limits Set By  
Relay 1 / Relay 2  
Phase Reversal  
Phase Imbalance  
Delay On  
Delay Off  
Decimal Placement  
Volts Decimal Placement  
This value decides the precision. User can change the values from 1 to 4.  
Amps Decimal Placement  
This value decides the precision. User can change the values from 1 to 4.  
WATT Decimal Placement  
VOLTS Full Scale  
If kilo volt inputs value is set then Voltage full-scale value is divided by 1000, showing the value in Kilo Volts.  
AMPS Full Scale  
If kilo Amp inputs value is set then Amps full-scale value is divided by 1000, showing the value in Kilo Amps.  
Reset  
WATT Hour  
VAR Hour  
VA Hour  
Note: Configured is displayed in green, Enabled in red and Reset in Amber.  
234  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPM5350P  
Special Note: This device supports GE32MTCP Server ONLY.  
This device belongs to Electro Industries family, which is tightly integrated device in to PMCS product. This device  
contains the following tabs.  
Metering Tab  
The screen explains various parameters of the device:  
Current (Amps)  
Phase (A, B, C and Neutral)  
Inst  
Max  
Voltage (Volts)  
Phase (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC and CA)  
Inst  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THD Current  
THD Voltage  
Energy  
WATT Hour  
VA Hour  
VAR Hour  
Power  
Real (WATT)  
Reactive (VAR)  
Apparent (VA)  
PF  
Setup One Tab  
The screen explains various parameters in relation with Relay 1 and Relay 2 such as:  
Configuration  
Kilo Volt Inputs  
Kilo Amp Input  
Mega Watt Input  
Phase Reverse Limits  
236  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Meter Setup  
Limits Set By  
Relay 1 / Relay 2  
Phase Reversal  
Phase Imbalance  
Delay On  
Delay Off  
Decimal Placement  
Volts Decimal Placement  
Amps Decimal Placement  
WATT Decimal Placement  
VOLTS Full Scale  
AMPS Full Scale  
Lim. Threshold for lmb (%)  
Reset  
WATT Hour  
VAR Hour  
VA Hour  
If it is kilo volt inputs, the decimal placement is 2 (as shown in the screen); if kilo amp input the decimal placement is 3  
and if mega watt input, it is 1.  
Note: Configured is displayed in green, Enabled in red and Reset in Amber.  
Setup Two Tab  
The screen explains various parameters related to Limits and Triggers:  
Brief explanation of each of the columns is described below  
Column  
Description  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Limit 1  
Limit 1 value for the Associated quantity (For example: Phase A Amps)  
Trigger - Relay 1  
LED display in Amber color : Limit 1 of the associated value will trigger Relay 1.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 1 of the associated value will not trigger Relay 1.  
LED display in Amber color : Limit 1 of the associated value will trigger Relay 2.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 1 of the associated value will not trigger Relay 2.  
Limit 2 value for the Associated quantity (For example: Phase A Amps)  
Trigger - Relay 2  
Limit 2  
Trigger - Relay 1  
LED display in Amber color : Limit 2 of the associated value will trigger Relay 1.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 2 of the associated value will not trigger Relay 1.  
LED display in Amber color : Limit 2 of the associated value will trigger Relay 2.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 2 of the associated value will not trigger Relay 2.  
LED display in RED color : Limit 1 of the associated value is Set for Above.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 1 of the associated value is Set for Below.  
LED display in RED color : Limit 2 of the associated value is Set for Above.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 2 of the associated value is Set for Below.  
LED display in GREEN color : The associated quantity is exceeded the Limit 1 value.  
LED display in Gray color: The associated quantity is NOT exceeded the Limit 1 value.  
LED display in GREEN color : The associated quantity is exceeded the Limit 2 value.  
LED display in Gray color: The associated quantity is NOT exceeded the Limit 2 value.  
Trigger - Relay 2  
Set Above/Below Limit 1  
Set Above/Below Limit 2  
Exceeded Limit 1  
Exceeded Limit 2  
Example 1  
Example 2  
Limit1 is Set for Above  
Limit 1 is 100 Amps  
Limit 2 is Set for Below  
Limit 2 is 80 Amps  
The associated Quantity is Phase A Instantaneous value is  
397 Amps  
The associated Quantity is Phase A Instantaneous value is  
50 Amps  
Exceeded Limit 1 will show in GREEN color as 397>100  
Exceeded Limit 1 will show in GREEN color as 50<80  
Current  
Phase A  
Phase B  
Phase C  
Neutral  
Voltage  
AN  
BN  
CN  
AB  
BC  
CA  
Power  
VA  
VAR  
WATT  
PF  
Frequency  
238  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPM5000P  
This device belongs to the Electro Industries family, which is a tightly integrated device in to the PMCS product. The  
device contains the following tabs:  
Metering  
The screen explains various parameters related to metering and status.  
Power (WATT): Instantaneous, Average, Maximum and Negative Maximum.  
Relay 1/Relay 2: Positive Limit 1, Negative Limit 1, Positive Limit 2 and Negative Limit 2. Delay On is displayed too.  
If the relay is on, it is displayed in green. If the relay is off, it remains in gray.  
Energy (kWh): WATT Hour and Negative WATT Hour. Interval is displayed.  
Power Full Scale: This value internally depends on the Power Displacement Value. Based on this the value the number  
of decimals will be displayed. For example  
If the Power Decimal Placement is set to 1, the value will have only one decimal place.  
If the Power Decimal Placement is set to 2, the value will have two decimal places, and so on and so forth. The maximum  
value allowed is 4.  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup  
The screen explains various parameters related to configuration and setup.  
Configuration: Mega WATT, Leading Zero, Reset Protection, Open Delta, KYZ Output for positive WH, KYZ Output  
for negative WH.  
Protocol: Relay 1, Relay 2, Communications and DC Output.  
Status/Value: The user can set the values in the Status and Value fields. Under Positive WATT and Negative WATT,  
the status is shown as Above/Below for Limit 1 and Limit 2. The user can directly set the status to the device by clicking  
on the arrow buttons on respective fields to change the value from Above to Below or from Below to Above. The user  
can enter the set values by clicking on the field that contains the rectangular box that filled with White color on respective  
fields by entering the desired set values. Once the user enters the set value, by clicking on the Set button of the respective  
field, will set the value in to the device. Against these settings the wizard will prompt user for the conformation.  
Legend: The Legend is applicable for Configuration parameters. Enabled status is displayed in red, Otherwise the status  
is displayed in gray.  
240  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPM9450Q/EPM9650Q  
This device belongs to the Electro Industries family, which is a tightly integrated device in to the PMCS product.  
The device comes with 2 versions – EPM9450Q and EPM9650Q. The EPM9450Q device does not support Waveform  
feature. The EPM9650Q supports Waveform features.  
The device offers the following features:  
Max/Min integration: Offers Maximum and Minimum values for every measured reading.  
8 Built-in Digital High-Speed Status Inputs: The device offers 8 High speed digital inputs.  
Demand: Measures Fixed window, Sliding window, Predictive and Themal demands.  
4 Communication Ports: There are 4 ports – Port 1, Port 2, Port 3 and Port 4.  
The device contains the following tabs:  
Metering  
The Metering tab shows following various parameters:  
Voltage Normal/ High Speed: This tab displays the voltage values of AN, BN, CN, AB, BC, CA and Aux.  
Current Normal/ High Speed: Displays currents of Phase A, B, C, measured and calculated.  
THD Normal/ High Speed: Displays THD values of Phase A, B, C for Voltage and Current an d K Factor.  
Power: Displays Phase A, B, C and 3 Phase Power Values for Real (Watt), Reactive (VAR), Apparent (VA) and  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PF.  
Frequency Normal/ High Speed: Displays Frequency in Hz.  
Min/Max  
The tab displays Maximum and Minimum values of various parameters. The user can get maximum and minimum values  
by clicking on respective buttons labeled Show Max and Show Min.  
Voltage: This tab displays the voltage values of AN, BN, CN, AB, BC, CA and Aux.  
Current: Displays currents of Phase A, B, C, measured and calculated.  
THD : Displays THD values of Phase A, B, C for Voltage and Current an d K Factor.  
Power Factor : Displays PF of Phase A, B, C and 3 Phase of 4 Quadrants namely Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4.  
Power: Displays Phase A, B, C and 3 Phase Power Values for Positive Watt, Coincendence VAR for Postive Watt,  
Negative Watt, Coincedance VAR for Negative Watt, Positive VAR, Negative VAR and VA.  
242  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Demand  
The screen explains various parameters related to demand values:  
Sliding Window Demand: Displays Average and Maximum Sliding window demand for Positive Watt,  
Coincendence VAR for Maximum Postive Watt, Negative Watt, Coincedance VAR for Maximum Negative Watt,  
Positive VAR, Negative VAR and VA. User can click on Sliding Window button to see the Sliding window  
Demand.  
Fixed Window Demand: Displays Average and Maximum Sliding window demand for Positive Watt,  
Coincendence VAR for Maximum Postive Watt, Negative Watt, Coincedance VAR for Maximum Negative Watt,  
Positive VAR, Negative VAR and VA. User can click on Fixed Window button to see the Fixed window Demand.  
Predictive Sliding Window Demand: Displays Predictive Sliding Window demand for WATT, VAR and VA.  
Energy: Displays Energy values for the parameters namely Positve kWh, Negative kWh, Positve kVARh, Negative  
kVARh and kVAh.  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thermal Average  
The screen explains about various parameters related to thermal average:  
Current (Amps): Displays the current readings for the phases A, B, C, Mea. (measured) and Cal. (calculated).  
Voltage (Volts): Displays the Voltage readings for the phases AN, BN, CN, AB, BC, CA and Aux.  
Power: Displays Phase A, B, C and 3 Phase Power Values for Real (Watt), Reactive (VAR) and Apparent (VA).  
244  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Inputs  
The Digital Inputs tab displays the following parameters of 8 digital inputs. They are  
Name: Displays the name of the Digital Input. The maximum allowed is 16 Character string.  
Open/Close Label: Based on the Digital input status, the corresponding label will be displayed. For example if the  
digital input status is OPEN then label for Open condition is displayed or if the digital input status is CLOSED then label  
for Closed condition is displayed.  
Status: The status is displayed Open/Closed. Open status showed in green and Closed status in gray.  
Counter: Displays the corresponding digital input counter value.  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup  
The screen explains various parameters related to setup.  
Current Set Points: Above and Below Current Setpoints are shown for Phase A, B, C, Measured and Calculated.  
Voltage Set Points: Above and Below Voltage Setpoints are shown AN, BN, CN, AB, BC, CA and Aux.  
PT Ratio: Displays Phase and Auxiliary values for Numerator and Denominator.  
CT Ratio: Displays Phase and Neutral values for Numerator and Denominator.  
Communication Parameters: Displays Port Addresses and Baudrate for each of the 4 Ports.  
Reset: This wizard allows user to reset the following Parameters.  
Energy  
Log  
Maximum and  
Minimum  
Voltage Phase Sequence: Displays Phase sequence as either C-B-A or A-B-C, based on the register value.  
246  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPM7430D/EPM7450D  
These devices belong to the Electro Industries family, which is a tightly integrated device in to the PMCS product.  
These devices communicate through EI Protocol (Electro Industries Protocol). The server used for these devices is  
GE32EIND.  
The device comes with 2 versions – EPM7430D and EPM7450D. Both the devices does not support Waveform and  
events features. So these two buttons will be disabled.  
Metering  
The Metering tab shows following various parameters:  
Voltage: This tab displays the voltage values of AN, BN, CN, AB, BC and CA.  
Current: Displays currents of Phase A, B, C and neutral.  
THD Current/THD Voltage: Displays THD values of Phase A, B and C for current and voltage.  
Energy: Displays values for Positive kWh, Negative kWh, Positive kVARh, Negative kVARh and kVAh,.  
Power: Displays Phase A, B, C and 3 Phase Power Values for Real (kW), Reactive (kVAR), Apparent (kVA) and  
PF.  
The wizard also displays the parameters Frequency (Hz), Phase Imbalance (%) and Phase Reversal. If Phase Reversal is  
ON, the wizard shows CBA, if not then shows ABC.  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Min/Max  
The tab displays Maximum and Minimum values of various parameters. The user can get maximum and minimum  
values by clicking on respective buttons labeled Show Max. Values and Show Min. Values.  
Voltage: This tab displays the voltage values of AN, BN, CN, AB, BC and CA.  
Current: Displays currents of Phase A, B, C and Neutral.  
THD : Displays THD values of Phase A, B, C for Current and Voltage.  
Power: Displays Phase A, B, C and 3 Phase Power Values for Positive kW, Negative kW, Positive kVAR, Negative  
kVAR, kVA, Positive PF and Negative PF.  
Frequency: Displays frequency in Hz.  
248  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Limits  
The screen explains various parameters related to Limits and Triggers:  
Limit 1 Trigger/Limit 2 Trigger (Relay 1, Relay 2 and Relay 3)  
Relay 1, Relay 2 and Relay 3 are triggered depending upon the Limit 1 and Limit 2 values. The screen also displays  
whether the Limit 1 and Limit 2 are set above or set below.  
Relay 1, Relay 2 and Relay 3 of Limit 1 and Limit 2 are displayed either as Not Triggered or Triggered. If the relay is  
triggered, the LED fills with amber, if not then gray.  
If Limit 1 or Limit 2 are set above, then the status is displayed in red, if not gray, meaning the Limits are set below,  
The Limit 1 and Limit 2 Parameters that are shown on the tab are  
Current: Phase A, Phase B, Phase C and Neutral.  
Voltage: AN, BN, CN, AB, BC, CA  
Power: VA, VAR, WATT, PF and Frequency  
Brief explanation of each of the columns is described below  
Column  
Description  
Limit 1  
Trigger - Relay 1  
Limit 1 value for the Associated quantity (For example: Phase A Amps)  
LED display in Amber color : Limit 1 of the associated value will trigger Relay 1.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 1 of the associated value will not trigger Relay 1.  
LED display in Amber color : Limit 1 of the associated value will trigger Relay 2.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 1 of the associated value will not trigger Relay 2.  
Trigger - Relay 2  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trigger - Relay 3  
LED display in Amber color : Limit 1 of the associated value will trigger Relay 3.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 1 of the associated value will not trigger Relay 3.  
Limit 2 value for the Associated quantity (For example: Phase A Amps)  
Limit 2  
Trigger - Relay 1  
LED display in Amber color : Limit 2 of the associated value will trigger Relay 1.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 2 of the associated value will not trigger Relay 1.  
LED display in Amber color : Limit 2 of the associated value will trigger Relay 2.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 2 of the associated value will not trigger Relay 2.  
LED display in Amber color : Limit 2 of the associated value will trigger Relay 3.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 2 of the associated value will not trigger Relay 3.  
LED display in RED color : Limit 1 of the associated value is Set for Above.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 1 of the associated value is Set for Below.  
LED display in RED color : Limit 2 of the associated value is Set for Above.  
LED display in Gray color: Limit 2 of the associated value is Set for Below.  
Trigger - Relay 2  
Trigger - Relay 3  
Set Above/Below Limit 1  
Set Above/Below Limit 2  
250  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup  
The screen shows the following parameters in relation with Relay 1, Relay 2 and Relay 3 such as:  
Configuration: The Parameters under configuration are Kilo Volt Inputs, Kilo Amp Input, Mega Watt Input, Phase  
Reverse Limits. If any of the above parameters are configured the LED shows Green otherwise LED shows Gray in color.  
Meter Setup: If this parameter is set then text displayed as Open Delta, if not then shows Non Open Delta.  
Limits Set By: If this parameter is set then text displayed as Average, if not then shows Instantaneous.  
Relay 1 / Relay 2/ Relay 3: This section shows the parameters Phase Imbalance, Delay On and Delay Off of Realy 1,  
Relay 2 and Relay 3.  
The Legend applicable Phase Imbalance is if any of the above parameters are Enabled the LED shows RED otherwise  
LED shows Gray in color.  
Full Scale Values: Displays Full Scale Voltage values for phases AN, B and CN; and Full Scale current values for  
phases A, B and C. Also shows Decimal Placement values of Volts, Amps and Power.  
Reset of Min and Max: Resets Minimum and Maximum values.  
For example:  
To reset Minimum values, when the button is clicked, a dialog box will appear asking “Reset minimum values?”. The  
dialog box contains Ok and Cancel buttons. If the Ok button is clicked, all the minimum values of parameters are reset. If  
the Cancel button is clicked, no Reset will occur.  
Reset of WATT Hour, VAR Hour and VA Hour:  
In resetting the above parameters 2 dialog boxes will prompt user to implement the functionality.  
For example:  
Dialog box 1: To reset Watt Hour, when the button is clicked, a dialog box will appear asking “Do you want to reset Watt  
Hour?”. The dialog box contains Ok and Cancel buttons. If the Ok button is clicked, then another dialog box prompts the  
user. If Cancel button is clicked the Dialog box 2 will not appear and no Reset will occur.  
Dialog box 2: Asking “Confirm the reset within 10 seconds”. If the Ok button is clicked the parameter is reset. If Cancel  
button is clicked no Reset will occur.  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Assertion Error  
Q: While switching between InTouch's Runtime and Development modes, the  
program crashed with an Assertion Error.  
A: This is a problem with InTouch Wonderware, not the GE PMCS Wizards. It  
occurs rarely during the development phase, and is not seen once a stable application  
has been developed and put into use. Reboot the computer and restart the application.  
EPM 3710/EPM 3720 – no data or incorrect data displayed  
Q: The values on the EPM 3710/3720 wizards come up showing zeros or incorrect  
data.  
A: The EPM 3710/3720 wizards require you to click the Refresh button on the  
wizard before the display is updated. Also, the first time the wizard is displayed, it  
may take a few moments for the DDE conversation to be established and data to be  
displayed.  
EPM 3720 – KVAH import values incorrect  
Q: On the EPM 3720 Tabular data screen, the KVAH import value does not equal  
the value of KVAH total or KVAH net when KVAH export equals zero.  
A: Some rapidly changing values and/or values requiring extensive calculations  
cannot be updated on the wizards quickly enough to reflect the data displayed on the  
device in real time. Be patient while the software catches up with the device.  
Long update when changing setpoints  
Q: I attempted to change a device setpoint (such as changing the VT connection type  
from WYE to DELTA). It took a long time to update the Wizards setpoint tab to  
reflect the changes.  
A: When changing setpoints, which are polled very slowly, the display may take a  
long time (a minute or more) to update. This means the metering data will be  
postponed while the display updates. Setpoint changes are a relatively rare change to  
make - please be patient during the delay.  
PLEPM – Wrong Metering tab displayed  
252  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: When I double-click the display on the PLEPM's Large Faceplate wizard to go to  
the Tabular data screen, the DELTA metering tab is displayed, even though the  
PLEPM is configured as WYE.  
A: Click another tab and then click back to the Metering tab. The correct  
configuration will now be displayed.  
InTouch applications – Windows not displayed properly  
Q: When an InTouch application containing PMCS Wizards has its resolution  
changed, the fonts in the wizard are not sized correctly. For instance, if I develop an  
application in 600 x 480 resolution and then convert it to 800 x 600 resolution, the  
screens look terrible, things extend off the screen, text formatting is changed, etc.  
A: First, make sure that the TrueType fonts option is turned on in Windows 2000  
SP2. If this option is off, it can cause font display problems even if windows have not  
been resized. Next, any time you change the resolution of an InTouch application  
containing PMCS Wizards, you'll need to delete the wizards from any converted  
Windows, and then add the wizards back in. When you add the wizard back in, it will  
display correctly.  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A:  
EPM 3720 Sliding Window  
Demand Keys  
Downloading Sliding Demand Window Keys to the EPM 3720  
The EPM 3720 supports up to 10 sliding demand measurements that are user-  
programmable via the Tabular Data screen wizard. The Sliding Demand tab offers a  
set of adjustable fields, into which a user can enter a key (a unique string of values)  
which, when downloaded to the EPM 3720, will trigger a measurement.  
For explanations of what the EPM 3720's various parameters mean, refer to the EPM  
3720 Users Guide, in the section titled Sliding Window Demand.  
To set the EPM 3720's sliding demand keys, follow the procedure below:  
Locate the key code for the parameter you wish to measure in the table below.  
1. Open the EPM 3720 Tabular Data screen wizard and select the Sliding  
Demand tab.  
2. Enter the appropriate sliding demand window key by clicking the on-  
screen thumbwheels up or down until the key code from the table below  
is displayed.  
3. Press the Download button to send the key to the device.  
4. Allow several seconds for transmission time, then press the Refresh  
button to verify that the device has accepted the setup parameter. The  
values displayed should be those downloaded. When it receives the  
downloaded key, the meter will perform a sliding demand measurement  
for the parameter selected by the key.  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#1  
#2  
#3 & #4  
Sliding Window Key Thumbwheel Settings  
Class  
Sub-  
Instance  
Measurement  
Supported Modes  
class  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
00  
Volts LN Average  
Volts LN Phase A  
Volts LN Phase B  
Volts LN Phase C  
Volts LL Average  
Volts LL Phase AB  
Volts LL Phase BC  
Volts LL Phase CA  
Amps Average  
Amps Phase A  
Amps Phase B  
Amps Phase C  
Amps Neutral  
Reserved  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
0A  
0B  
0C  
0D  
0E  
0F  
10  
Volts Imbalance (0-100)  
Amps Imbalance (0-100)  
kW Total  
HS STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD HRS  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD HRS  
STD TD SD PD  
11  
kW Phase A  
12  
kW Phase B  
13  
kW Phase C  
14  
kVAR Total  
15  
kVAR Phase A  
kVAR Phase B  
kVAR Phase C  
kVA Total  
16  
STD TD SD PD  
17  
STD TD SD PD  
18  
HS STD TD SD PD HRS  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
19  
kVA Phase A  
kVA Phase B  
kVA Phase C  
PF Total  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
1E  
1F  
20  
PF Phase A  
STD TD SD PD  
PF Phase B  
STD TD SD PD  
PF Phase C  
STD TD SD PD  
Frequency  
HS STD TD SD PD  
21-23  
24  
Reserved  
Phase Reversal (0 or 1)  
Reserved  
HS STD  
25-27  
28  
VAUX  
STD TD SD PD  
256  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#1  
#2  
#3 & #4  
Sliding Window Key Thumbwheel Settings  
Class  
Sub-  
Instance  
Measurement  
Supported Modes  
class  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
29-2F  
30  
Reserved  
I2T Avg. (0 = Off, 1= On)  
I2T Phase A (0=Off, 1=On)  
I2T Phase B (0=Off, 1=On)  
I2T Phase C (0=Off, 1=On)  
Reserved  
HS  
HS  
HS  
HS  
31  
32  
33  
34-67  
68  
V1 HD - K-Factor  
V2 HD - K-Factor  
V3 HD - K-Factor  
VAUX HD - K-Factor  
I1 HD - K-Factor  
I2 HD - K-Factor  
I3 HD - K-Factor  
I4 HD - K-Factor  
V1 HD - Total Odd  
V2 HD - Total Odd  
V3 HD - Total Odd  
VAUX HD - Total Odd  
I1 HD - Total Odd  
I2 HD - Total Odd  
I3 HD - Total Odd  
I4 HD - Total Odd  
V1 HD - Total Even  
V2 HD - Total Even  
V3 HD - Total Even  
VAUX HD - Total Even  
I1 HD - Total Even  
I2 HD - Total Even  
I3 HD - Total Even  
I4 HD - Total Even  
V1 HD - Total  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
69  
6A  
6B  
6C  
6D  
6E  
6F  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
7A  
7B  
7C  
7D  
7E  
7F  
80  
81  
V2 HD - Total  
82  
V3 HD - Total  
83  
VAUX HD - Total  
I1 HD - Total  
84  
85  
I2 HD - Total  
86  
I3 HD - Total  
87  
I4 HD - Total  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#1  
#2  
#3 & #4  
Sliding Window Key Thumbwheel Settings  
Class  
Sub-  
Instance  
Measurement  
Supported Modes  
class  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
88  
V1 HD - Harmonic #1  
V2 HD - Harmonic #1  
V3 HD - Harmonic #1  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #1  
I1 HD - Harmonic #1  
I2 HD - Harmonic #1  
I3 HD - Harmonic #1  
I4 HD - Harmonic #1  
V1 HD - Harmonic #2  
V2 HD - Harmonic #2  
V3 HD - Harmonic #2  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #2  
I1 HD - Harmonic #2  
I2 HD - Harmonic #2  
I3 HD - Harmonic #2  
I4 HD - Harmonic #2  
V1 HD - Harmonic #3  
V2 HD - Harmonic #3  
V3 HD - Harmonic #3  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #3  
I1 HD - Harmonic #3  
I2 HD - Harmonic #3  
I3 HD - Harmonic #3  
I4 HD - Harmonic #3  
V1 HD - Harmonic #4  
V2 HD - Harmonic #4  
V3 HD - Harmonic #4  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #4  
I1 HD - Harmonic #4  
I2 HD - Harmonic #4  
I3 HD - Harmonic #4  
I4 HD - Harmonic #4  
V1 HD - Harmonic #5  
V2 HD - Harmonic #5  
V3 HD - Harmonic #5  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #5  
I1 HD - Harmonic #5  
I2 HD - Harmonic #5  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
89  
8A  
8B  
8C  
8D  
8E  
8F  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
9A  
9B  
9C  
9D  
9E  
9F  
A0  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
A9  
AA  
AB  
AC  
AD  
258  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#1  
#2  
#3 & #4  
Sliding Window Key Thumbwheel Settings  
Class  
Sub-  
Instance  
Measurement  
Supported Modes  
class  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
AE  
AF  
B0  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
B9  
BA  
BB  
BC  
BD  
BE  
BF  
C0  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
C5  
C6  
C7  
C8  
C9  
CA  
CB  
CC  
CD  
CE  
CF  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
I3 HD - Harmonic #5  
I4 HD - Harmonic #5  
V1 HD - Harmonic #6  
V2 HD - Harmonic #6  
V3 HD - Harmonic #6  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #6  
I1 HD - Harmonic #6  
I2 HD - Harmonic #6  
I3 HD - Harmonic #6  
I4 HD - Harmonic #6  
V1 HD - Harmonic #7  
V2 HD - Harmonic #7  
V3 HD - Harmonic #7  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #7  
I1 HD - Harmonic #7  
I2 HD - Harmonic #7  
I3 HD - Harmonic #7  
I4 HD - Harmonic #7  
V1 HD - Harmonic #8  
V2 HD - Harmonic #8  
V3 HD - Harmonic #8  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #8  
I1 HD - Harmonic #8  
I2 HD - Harmonic #8  
I3 HD - Harmonic #8  
I4 HD - Harmonic #8  
V1 HD - Harmonic #9  
V2 HD - Harmonic #9  
V3 HD - Harmonic #9  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #9  
I1 HD - Harmonic #9  
I2 HD - Harmonic #9  
I3 HD - Harmonic #9  
I4 HD - Harmonic #9  
V1 HD - Harmonic #10  
V2 HD - Harmonic #10  
V3 HD - Harmonic #10  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #10  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#1  
#2  
#3 & #4  
Sliding Window Key Thumbwheel Settings  
Class  
Sub-  
Instance  
Measurement  
Supported Modes  
class  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
DA  
DB  
DC  
DD  
DE  
DF  
E0  
E1  
E2  
E3  
E4  
E5  
E6  
E7  
E8  
E9  
EA  
EB  
EC  
ED  
EE  
EF  
F0  
I1 HD - Harmonic #10  
I2 HD - Harmonic #10  
I3 HD - Harmonic #10  
I4 HD - Harmonic #10  
V1 HD - Harmonic #11  
V2 HD - Harmonic #11  
V3 HD - Harmonic #11  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #11  
I1 HD - Harmonic #11  
I2 HD - Harmonic #11  
I3 HD - Harmonic #11  
I4 HD - Harmonic #11  
V1 HD - Harmonic #12  
V2 HD - Harmonic #12  
V3 HD - Harmonic #12  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #12  
I1 HD - Harmonic #12  
I2 HD - Harmonic #12  
I3 HD - Harmonic #12  
I4 HD - Harmonic #12  
V1 HD - Harmonic #13  
V2 HD - Harmonic #13  
V3 HD - Harmonic #13  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #13  
I1 HD - Harmonic #13  
I2 HD - Harmonic #13  
I3 HD - Harmonic #13  
I4 HD - Harmonic #13  
V1 HD - Harmonic #14  
V2 HD - Harmonic #14  
V3 HD - Harmonic #14  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #14  
I1 HD - Harmonic #14  
I2 HD - Harmonic #14  
I3 HD - Harmonic #14  
I4 HD - Harmonic #14  
V1 HD - Harmonic #15  
V2 HD - Harmonic #15  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
260  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#1  
#2  
#3 & #4  
Sliding Window Key Thumbwheel Settings  
Class  
Sub-  
Instance  
Measurement  
Supported Modes  
class  
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
FA  
FB  
FC  
FD  
FE  
V3 HD - Harmonic #15  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #15  
I1 HD - Harmonic #15  
I2 HD - Harmonic #15  
I3 HD - Harmonic #15  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
Table A-1. EPM 3720 Sliding Window Demand Keys.  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(This page left blank intentionally.)  
262  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B:  
Automatic Waveform Capture and  
Waveform Retrieval on EPM3720  
Using a setpoint to trigger waveform capture or record on the EPM 3720  
When a Setpoint is programmed from the MMI, the EPM3720 has the ability to  
automatically capture or record waveforms based on the value of a specified  
parameter. In order to display a Waveform Capture, the meter takes 128 samples  
from a full cycle of any single selected channel. For a Waveform Record, the meter  
takes 16 samples per cycle from multiple cycles on all 8 inputs simultaneously. The  
device will store 36 cycles of 1 event, 18 cycles of 2 events, or 12 cycles of 3 events,  
depending on the Record Depth programmed by the user. Please follow the  
instructions below to use a Setpoint to trigger a waveform capture or record on the  
EPM3720.  
For explanations of what the EPM 3720's various parameters mean, refer to the EPM  
3720 Users Guide, in the section titled Sliding Window Demand.  
1. In the EPM3720 MMI tabular screen, click on the Setpoints tab.  
2. Choose an unassigned setpoint number. Either Standard or High Speed  
may be used, but High Speed is recommended for quicker response.  
(See Section 6 of the 3720 ACM Installation & Operation Manual for  
more details on configuring Setpoints.)  
3. Based on the parameter that will be set in the Trigger Key, select the  
Setpoint Type.  
4. Set the Trigger Key. The Trigger Key is a code for the parameter that,  
when its value passes a set limit, triggers an Action. Refer to the table in  
this section for a list of Trigger Key codes.  
5. Enter the High and Low Limits as well as any Time Delays to operate  
and release.  
6. Select the required Action. To record a waveform, choose Waveform  
Recorder. For Waveform Capture, remember that the waveform of  
only one input may be automatically captured. Choose Waveform  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Capture Channel X where X represents an integer between 1 and 8.  
Following are the Channel assignments for Wye and Delta systems.  
7. Press the Download key. This will transmit the values entered into the  
Setpoints tabular screen for the selected setpoint number to the device.  
After several seconds press the Refresh button and scroll to the  
selected setpoint to verify that the device has accepted the setpoint  
entered parameters.  
8. For waveform record, open the Waveform Capture program from  
within the MMI. On the main screen, select the appropriate Topic or  
device name and click on the Record radio button. Then, under the  
menu Waveform>Configure>Record Depth, select a depth of either 1  
event x 36 cycles, 2 events x 18 cycles, or 3 events x 12 cycles. Press  
OK. The Trigger, Arm, and Retrieve buttons will become inactive as  
the depth is downloaded to the meter. For waveform capture proceed  
directly to step 9.  
9. Once the Trigger, Arm, & Retrieve buttons become active, press the  
Arm button. The Trigger, Arm, & Retrieve buttons will momentarily  
become inactive. When the buttons become active, the meter is now  
ready to record/capture a waveform when the setpoint conditions are  
reached.  
10. Once the waveform has been automatically captured or recorded and  
the event has been logged, choose the appropriate Topic and function;  
i.e., in the main screen of the Waveform Capture program, press  
Retrieve.  
11. View and save waveforms as desired.  
12. To rearm the meter and clear the waveform data out of the device’s  
memory, press Arm on the main screen of the Waveform Capture  
program.  
264  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#1  
#2  
#3 & #4  
Trigger Key Thumbwheel Setting  
Meaning  
Class  
Sub-class  
Instance  
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
C
D
E
F
0
00  
Null Object Identifier  
00-05  
00-02  
00-07  
00  
Digital Inputs (Status Inputs)  
Digital Outputs (Relays)  
Analog Inputs (Voltage & Current Inputs)  
Analog Outputs (IOUT)  
00-05  
00-02  
00-05  
00-02  
00-05  
00-02  
00-03  
00-03  
Digital Inputs (Status Inputs) -- Status  
Digital Outputs (Relays) -- Status  
Digital Inputs (Status Inputs) -- Counter  
Digital Outputs (Relays) -- Counter  
Digital Inputs (Status Inputs) -- Preset/Reset  
Digital Outputs (Relays) -- Reset  
Digital Inputs (Status Inputs) -- Scale  
Digital Inputs (Status Inputs) -- Rollover  
High-speed Present  
see valid  
instances  
below  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
see valid  
instances  
below  
Standard Present  
see valid  
instances  
below  
Thermal Demand Present  
Sliding Window Demand Present  
High-speed Minimum  
see valid  
instances  
below  
see valid  
instances  
below  
see valid  
instances  
below  
Standard Minimum  
see valid  
instances  
below  
Thermal Demand Minimum  
Sliding Window Demand Minimum  
High-speed Maximum  
see valid  
instances  
below  
see valid  
instances  
below  
see valid  
instances  
below  
Standard Maximum  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                   
#1  
#2  
#3 & #4  
Trigger Key Thumbwheel Setting  
Class  
Sub-class  
Instance  
Meaning  
4
A
see valid  
instances  
below  
Thermal Demand Maximum  
4
4
4
4
4
B
C
D
E
F
see valid  
instances  
below  
Sliding Window Demand Maximum  
Hours - Net (Import - Export)  
Hours - Import  
see valid  
instances  
below  
see valid  
instances  
below  
see valid  
instances  
below  
Hours - Export  
see valid  
instances  
below  
Hours - Total (Import + Export)  
ß
Instance  
00  
Measurement  
Supported Modes  
Volts LN Average  
Volts LN Phase A  
Volts LN Phase B  
Volts LN Phase C  
Volts LL Average  
Volts LL Phase AB  
Volts LL Phase BC  
Volts LL Phase CA  
Amps Average  
Amps Phase A  
Amps Phase B  
Amps Phase C  
Amps Neutral  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
0A  
0B  
0C  
0D  
0E  
0F  
10  
Reserved  
Volts Imbalance (0-100)  
Amps Imbalance (0-100)  
kW Total  
HS STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD HRS  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD HRS  
STD TD SD PD  
11  
kW Phase A  
12  
kW Phase B  
13  
kW Phase C  
14  
kVAR Total  
15  
kVAR Phase A  
kVAR Phase B  
16  
STD TD SD PD  
266  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#1  
#2  
#3 & #4  
Trigger Key Thumbwheel Setting  
Meaning  
Class  
Sub-class  
Instance  
17  
kVAR Phase C  
STD TD SD PD  
18  
kVA Total  
HS STD TD SD PD HRS  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
19  
kVA Phase A  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
1E  
1F  
kVA Phase B  
kVA Phase C  
PF Total  
PF Phase A  
STD TD SD PD  
PF Phase B  
STD TD SD PD  
PF Phase C  
STD TD SD PD  
20  
Frequency  
HS STD TD SD PD  
21-23  
24  
Reserved  
Phase Reversal (0 or 1)  
Reserved  
HS STD  
25-27  
28  
VAUX  
STD TD SD PD  
29-2F  
30  
Reserved  
I2T Avg. (0 = Off, 1= On)  
I2T Phase A (0=Off, 1=On)  
I2T Phase B (0=Off, 1=On)  
I2T Phase C (0=Off, 1=On)  
Reserved  
HS  
HS  
HS  
HS  
31  
32  
33  
34-67  
68  
V1 HD - K-Factor  
V2 HD - K-Factor  
V3 HD - K-Factor  
VAUX HD - K-Factor  
I1 HD - K-Factor  
I2 HD - K-Factor  
I3 HD - K-Factor  
I4 HD - K-Factor  
V1 HD - Total Odd  
V2 HD - Total Odd  
V3 HD - Total Odd  
VAUX HD - Total Odd  
I1 HD - Total Odd  
I2 HD - Total Odd  
I3 HD - Total Odd  
I4 HD - Total Odd  
V1 HD - Total Even  
V2 HD - Total Even  
V3 HD - Total Even  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
69  
6A  
6B  
6C  
6D  
6E  
6F  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
7A  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#1  
#2  
#3 & #4  
Trigger Key Thumbwheel Setting  
Meaning  
Class  
Sub-class  
Instance  
7B  
7C  
7D  
7E  
7F  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
8A  
8B  
8C  
8D  
8E  
8F  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
9A  
9B  
9C  
9D  
9E  
9F  
A0  
A1  
VAUX HD - Total Even  
I1 HD - Total Even  
I2 HD - Total Even  
I3 HD - Total Even  
I4 HD - Total Even  
V1 HD - Total  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
V2 HD - Total  
V3 HD - Total  
VAUX HD - Total  
I1 HD - Total  
I2 HD - Total  
I3 HD - Total  
I4 HD - Total  
V1 HD - Harmonic #1  
V2 HD - Harmonic #1  
V3 HD - Harmonic #1  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #1  
I1 HD - Harmonic #1  
I2 HD - Harmonic #1  
I3 HD - Harmonic #1  
I4 HD - Harmonic #1  
V1 HD - Harmonic #2  
V2 HD - Harmonic #2  
V3 HD - Harmonic #2  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #2  
I1 HD - Harmonic #2  
I2 HD - Harmonic #2  
I3 HD - Harmonic #2  
I4 HD - Harmonic #2  
V1 HD - Harmonic #3  
V2 HD - Harmonic #3  
V3 HD - Harmonic #3  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #3  
I1 HD - Harmonic #3  
I2 HD - Harmonic #3  
I3 HD - Harmonic #3  
I4 HD - Harmonic #3  
V1 HD - Harmonic #4  
V2 HD - Harmonic #4  
268  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#1  
#2  
#3 & #4  
Trigger Key Thumbwheel Setting  
Meaning  
Class  
Sub-class  
Instance  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
A9  
AA  
AB  
AC  
AD  
AE  
AF  
B0  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
B9  
BA  
BB  
BC  
BD  
BE  
BF  
C0  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
C5  
C6  
C7  
C8  
V3 HD - Harmonic #4  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #4  
I1 HD - Harmonic #4  
I2 HD - Harmonic #4  
I3 HD - Harmonic #4  
I4 HD - Harmonic #4  
V1 HD - Harmonic #5  
V2 HD - Harmonic #5  
V3 HD - Harmonic #5  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #5  
I1 HD - Harmonic #5  
I2 HD - Harmonic #5  
I3 HD - Harmonic #5  
I4 HD - Harmonic #5  
V1 HD - Harmonic #6  
V2 HD - Harmonic #6  
V3 HD - Harmonic #6  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #6  
I1 HD - Harmonic #6  
I2 HD - Harmonic #6  
I3 HD - Harmonic #6  
I4 HD - Harmonic #6  
V1 HD - Harmonic #7  
V2 HD - Harmonic #7  
V3 HD - Harmonic #7  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #7  
I1 HD - Harmonic #7  
I2 HD - Harmonic #7  
I3 HD - Harmonic #7  
I4 HD - Harmonic #7  
V1 HD - Harmonic #8  
V2 HD - Harmonic #8  
V3 HD - Harmonic #8  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #8  
I1 HD - Harmonic #8  
I2 HD - Harmonic #8  
I3 HD - Harmonic #8  
I4 HD - Harmonic #8  
V1 HD - Harmonic #9  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#1  
#2  
#3 & #4  
Trigger Key Thumbwheel Setting  
Meaning  
Class  
Sub-class  
Instance  
C9  
CA  
CB  
CC  
CD  
CE  
CF  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
DA  
DB  
DC  
DD  
DE  
DF  
E0  
V2 HD - Harmonic #9  
V3 HD - Harmonic #9  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #9  
I1 HD - Harmonic #9  
I2 HD - Harmonic #9  
I3 HD - Harmonic #9  
I4 HD - Harmonic #9  
V1 HD - Harmonic #10  
V2 HD - Harmonic #10  
V3 HD - Harmonic #10  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #10  
I1 HD - Harmonic #10  
I2 HD - Harmonic #10  
I3 HD - Harmonic #10  
I4 HD - Harmonic #10  
V1 HD - Harmonic #11  
V2 HD - Harmonic #11  
V3 HD - Harmonic #11  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #11  
I1 HD - Harmonic #11  
I2 HD - Harmonic #11  
I3 HD - Harmonic #11  
I4 HD - Harmonic #11  
V1 HD - Harmonic #12  
V2 HD - Harmonic #12  
V3 HD - Harmonic #12  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #12  
I1 HD - Harmonic #12  
I2 HD - Harmonic #12  
I3 HD - Harmonic #12  
I4 HD - Harmonic #12  
V1 HD - Harmonic #13  
V2 HD - Harmonic #13  
V3 HD - Harmonic #13  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #13  
I1 HD - Harmonic #13  
I2 HD - Harmonic #13  
I3 HD - Harmonic #13  
I4 HD - Harmonic #13  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
E1  
E2  
E3  
E4  
E5  
E6  
E7  
E8  
E9  
EA  
EB  
EC  
ED  
EE  
EF  
270  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                          
#1  
#2  
#3 & #4  
Trigger Key Thumbwheel Setting  
Meaning  
Class  
Sub-class  
Instance  
F0  
V1 HD - Harmonic #14  
V2 HD - Harmonic #14  
V3 HD - Harmonic #14  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #14  
I1 HD - Harmonic #14  
I2 HD - Harmonic #14  
I3 HD - Harmonic #14  
I4 HD - Harmonic #14  
V1 HD - Harmonic #15  
V2 HD - Harmonic #15  
V3 HD - Harmonic #15  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #15  
I1 HD - Harmonic #15  
I2 HD - Harmonic #15  
I3 HD - Harmonic #15  
I4 HD - Harmonic #15  
Reserved  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
FA  
FB  
FC  
FD  
FE  
FF  
6
6
0-2  
3
Reserved  
see valid  
instances  
below  
Predicted Sliding Window Demand Present  
6
6
4-6  
7
Reserved  
Reserved  
see valid  
instances  
below  
Predicted Sliding Window Demand Minimum  
6
6
8-A  
B
Reserved  
Reserved  
see valid  
instances  
below  
Predicted Sliding Window Demand Maximum  
6
C-F  
Reserved  
Reserved  
ß
Instance  
00  
Measurement  
Supported Modes  
Volts LN Average  
Volts LN Phase A  
Volts LN Phase B  
Volts LN Phase C  
Volts LL Average  
Volts LL Phase AB  
Volts LL Phase BC  
Volts LL Phase CA  
Amps Average  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
Amps Phase A  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#1  
#2  
#3 & #4  
Trigger Key Thumbwheel Setting  
Meaning  
Class  
Sub-class  
Instance  
0A  
0B  
0C  
0D  
0E  
0F  
Amps Phase B  
Amps Phase C  
Amps Neutral  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
Reserved  
Volts Imbalance (0-100)  
Amps Imbalance (0-100)  
kW Total  
HS STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
10  
HS STD TD SD PD HRS  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD HRS  
STD TD SD PD  
11  
kW Phase A  
12  
kW Phase B  
13  
kW Phase C  
14  
kVAR Total  
15  
kVAR Phase A  
kVAR Phase B  
kVAR Phase C  
kVA Total  
16  
STD TD SD PD  
17  
STD TD SD PD  
18  
HS STD TD SD PD HRS  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
HS STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
19  
kVA Phase A  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
1E  
1F  
kVA Phase B  
kVA Phase C  
PF Total  
PF Phase A  
STD TD SD PD  
PF Phase B  
STD TD SD PD  
PF Phase C  
STD TD SD PD  
20  
Frequency  
HS STD TD SD PD  
21-23  
24  
Reserved  
Phase Reversal (0 or 1)  
Reserved  
HS STD  
25-27  
28  
VAUX  
STD TD SD PD  
29-2F  
30  
Reserved  
I2T Avg. (0 = Off, 1= On)  
I2T Phase A (0=Off, 1=On)  
I2T Phase B (0=Off, 1=On)  
I2T Phase C (0=Off, 1=On)  
Reserved  
HS  
HS  
HS  
HS  
31  
32  
33  
34-67  
68  
V1 HD - K-Factor  
V2 HD - K-Factor  
V3 HD - K-Factor  
VAUX HD - K-Factor  
I1 HD - K-Factor  
I2 HD - K-Factor  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
69  
6A  
6B  
6C  
6D  
272  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#1  
#2  
#3 & #4  
Trigger Key Thumbwheel Setting  
Meaning  
Class  
Sub-class  
Instance  
6E  
6F  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
7A  
7B  
7C  
7D  
7E  
7F  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
8A  
8B  
8C  
8D  
8E  
8F  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
I3 HD - K-Factor  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
I4 HD - K-Factor  
V1 HD - Total Odd  
V2 HD - Total Odd  
V3 HD - Total Odd  
VAUX HD - Total Odd  
I1 HD - Total Odd  
I2 HD - Total Odd  
I3 HD - Total Odd  
I4 HD - Total Odd  
V1 HD - Total Even  
V2 HD - Total Even  
V3 HD - Total Even  
VAUX HD - Total Even  
I1 HD - Total Even  
I2 HD - Total Even  
I3 HD - Total Even  
I4 HD - Total Even  
V1 HD - Total  
V2 HD - Total  
V3 HD - Total  
VAUX HD - Total  
I1 HD - Total  
I2 HD - Total  
I3 HD - Total  
I4 HD - Total  
V1 HD - Harmonic #1  
V2 HD - Harmonic #1  
V3 HD - Harmonic #1  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #1  
I1 HD - Harmonic #1  
I2 HD - Harmonic #1  
I3 HD - Harmonic #1  
I4 HD - Harmonic #1  
V1 HD - Harmonic #2  
V2 HD - Harmonic #2  
V3 HD - Harmonic #2  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #2  
I1 HD - Harmonic #2  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#1  
#2  
#3 & #4  
Trigger Key Thumbwheel Setting  
Meaning  
Class  
Sub-class  
Instance  
95  
I2 HD - Harmonic #2  
I3 HD - Harmonic #2  
I4 HD - Harmonic #2  
V1 HD - Harmonic #3  
V2 HD - Harmonic #3  
V3 HD - Harmonic #3  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #3  
I1 HD - Harmonic #3  
I2 HD - Harmonic #3  
I3 HD - Harmonic #3  
I4 HD - Harmonic #3  
V1 HD - Harmonic #4  
V2 HD - Harmonic #4  
V3 HD - Harmonic #4  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #4  
I1 HD - Harmonic #4  
I2 HD - Harmonic #4  
I3 HD - Harmonic #4  
I4 HD - Harmonic #4  
V1 HD - Harmonic #5  
V2 HD - Harmonic #5  
V3 HD - Harmonic #5  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #5  
I1 HD - Harmonic #5  
I2 HD - Harmonic #5  
I3 HD - Harmonic #5  
I4 HD - Harmonic #5  
V1 HD - Harmonic #6  
V2 HD - Harmonic #6  
V3 HD - Harmonic #6  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #6  
I1 HD - Harmonic #6  
I2 HD - Harmonic #6  
I3 HD - Harmonic #6  
I4 HD - Harmonic #6  
V1 HD - Harmonic #7  
V2 HD - Harmonic #7  
V3 HD - Harmonic #7  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #7  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
96  
97  
98  
99  
9A  
9B  
9C  
9D  
9E  
9F  
A0  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
A9  
AA  
AB  
AC  
AD  
AE  
AF  
B0  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
B9  
BA  
BB  
274  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#1  
#2  
#3 & #4  
Trigger Key Thumbwheel Setting  
Meaning  
Class  
Sub-class  
Instance  
BC  
BD  
BE  
BF  
C0  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
C5  
C6  
C7  
C8  
C9  
CA  
CB  
CC  
CD  
CE  
CF  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
DA  
DB  
DC  
DD  
DE  
DF  
E0  
I1 HD - Harmonic #7  
I2 HD - Harmonic #7  
I3 HD - Harmonic #7  
I4 HD - Harmonic #7  
V1 HD - Harmonic #8  
V2 HD - Harmonic #8  
V3 HD - Harmonic #8  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #8  
I1 HD - Harmonic #8  
I2 HD - Harmonic #8  
I3 HD - Harmonic #8  
I4 HD - Harmonic #8  
V1 HD - Harmonic #9  
V2 HD - Harmonic #9  
V3 HD - Harmonic #9  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #9  
I1 HD - Harmonic #9  
I2 HD - Harmonic #9  
I3 HD - Harmonic #9  
I4 HD - Harmonic #9  
V1 HD - Harmonic #10  
V2 HD - Harmonic #10  
V3 HD - Harmonic #10  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #10  
I1 HD - Harmonic #10  
I2 HD - Harmonic #10  
I3 HD - Harmonic #10  
I4 HD - Harmonic #10  
V1 HD - Harmonic #11  
V2 HD - Harmonic #11  
V3 HD - Harmonic #11  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #11  
I1 HD - Harmonic #11  
I2 HD - Harmonic #11  
I3 HD - Harmonic #11  
I4 HD - Harmonic #11  
V1 HD - Harmonic #12  
V2 HD - Harmonic #12  
V3 HD - Harmonic #12  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
E1  
E2  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#1  
#2  
#3 & #4  
Trigger Key Thumbwheel Setting  
Meaning  
Class  
Sub-class  
Instance  
E3  
E4  
E5  
E6  
E7  
E8  
E9  
EA  
EB  
EC  
ED  
EE  
EF  
F0  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
FA  
FB  
FC  
FD  
FE  
FF  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #12  
I1 HD - Harmonic #12  
I2 HD - Harmonic #12  
I3 HD - Harmonic #12  
I4 HD - Harmonic #12  
V1 HD - Harmonic #13  
V2 HD - Harmonic #13  
V3 HD - Harmonic #13  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #13  
I1 HD - Harmonic #13  
I2 HD - Harmonic #13  
I3 HD - Harmonic #13  
I4 HD - Harmonic #13  
V1 HD - Harmonic #14  
V2 HD - Harmonic #14  
V3 HD - Harmonic #14  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #14  
I1 HD - Harmonic #14  
I2 HD - Harmonic #14  
I3 HD - Harmonic #14  
I4 HD - Harmonic #14  
V1 HD - Harmonic #15  
V2 HD - Harmonic #15  
V3 HD - Harmonic #15  
VAUX HD - Harmonic #15  
I1 HD - Harmonic #15  
I2 HD - Harmonic #15  
I3 HD - Harmonic #15  
I4 HD - Harmonic #15  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
STD TD SD PD  
Table B-1. EPM 3720 Trigger Keys.  
276  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The action keys specify the instance number for an object to perform an action on.  
The following action keys are possible:  
Action Key  
Setpoint  
Meaning  
Supported  
0
-
No action  
1000-1004  
1100-1102  
1C00-1C04  
A400-A407  
A500  
STD HS  
STD HS  
STD HS  
STD HS  
STD HS  
Clear digital input counter 0-3 (Status input counter 1-4), 4=ALL  
Operate Relay #1 to 3  
same as 1000-1004  
Waveform Capture channels #1 to 8  
Waveform Recorder  
Action keys marked with STD are supported by Standard Setpoints (1–11), action  
keys marked with HS are supported by High Speed Setpoints (1–6).  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(This page left blank intentionally.)  
278  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C: EPM 7700 - Special  
Considerations  
EPM 7700 Tags Subject to Deactivation by Tabular Data Screen Wizard  
This appendix lists the EPM 7700 tags which may be activated or deactivated by the  
EPM 7700 Tabular Data Screen wizard. This information is of use for developers  
creating their own wizards to access the EPM 7700’s data. If you wish to use a tag in  
a custom wizard you are developing, check this table to see if it is subject to  
deactivation by the Tabular Data Screen wizard. If it is, you may wish to create a  
duplicate tag with a unique name to access the same register. Otherwise, it is possible  
that the tag may be deactivated by the Tabular Data Screen wizard, and the data will  
be unavailable for use by your custom wizard.  
NOTE: It is important to keep in mind that tags which may be deactivated by the  
Tabular Data Screen Wizard will not work properly with InTouch’s trending  
features.  
NOTE: _Anlg or _Msg indicate Internal Tags for display use; _GWY indicates I/O  
Tags which talk to GE77GTWY. All others tags talk to ION_LINK  
Memory Discrete  
Comment  
Subject to  
deactivation?  
DeviceNm_Min  
Tag to indicate whether to show min or max on min/max page  
N
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Discrete  
Comment  
Subject to  
deactivation?  
DeviceNm_CommFail  
Comm Fail Indicator for Pegasys DDE Server - ION_LINK  
N
I/O Discrete  
Comment  
DeviceNm_24576  
DeviceNm_24577  
DeviceNm_24578  
DeviceNm_24579  
DeviceNm_24580  
DeviceNm_24581  
DeviceNm_24582  
DeviceNm_24583  
DeviceNm_24584  
DeviceNm_24721_GWY  
DeviceNm_24721  
DeviceNm_24722_GWY  
DeviceNm_24722  
DeviceNm_24723_GWY  
DeviceNm_24723  
DeviceNm_24724_GWY  
DeviceNm_24724  
DeviceNm_24725_GWY  
DeviceNm_24725  
DeviceNm_25053  
DeviceNm_25054  
DeviceNm_25055  
DeviceNm_25056  
DeviceNm_25057  
DeviceNm_25064  
DeviceNm_25065  
DeviceNm_25066  
DeviceNm_25067  
DeviceNm_25074  
PHASE_REVERSAL  
DIO1  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
DIO2  
DIO3  
DIO4  
DIO5  
DIO6  
DIO7  
DIO8  
Enable_SagSwell  
External Boolean 3 - Enable Sag Swell  
Enable_Transient  
External Boolean 4 - Enable Transient  
Enable_OverKW  
External Boolean 5 - Enable Over SWD KW  
Enable_OverAmp  
External Boolean 6 - Enable Over Current  
Enable_OverVunb  
External Boolean 7 - Enable Over Vunbal  
OVER_KW  
OVER_IA_STATUS  
OVER_IB_STATUS  
OVER_IC_STATUS  
OVER_VUN_STATUS  
OVER_IA_OVER  
OVER_IB_OVER  
OVER_IC_OVER  
OVER_VUN_OVER  
OVER_IA_UNDER  
OVER_IB_UNDER  
OVER_IC_UNDER  
OVER_VUN_UNDER  
Reset_MinMax  
DeviceNm_25075  
DeviceNm_25076  
DeviceNm_25077  
DeviceNm_26798_GWY  
DeviceNm_26799_GWY  
DeviceNm_26800_GWY  
DeviceNm_26802_GWY  
DeviceNm_26803_GWY  
Reset_SWD  
Reset_Thermal  
Reset_SCounter  
Reset_Energy  
280  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Discrete  
Comment  
Subject to  
deactivation?  
DeviceNm_26804_GWY  
Reset_Dist_Cnt  
N
Memory Integer  
Comment  
DeviceNm_28672_Anlg  
DeviceNm_28673_Anlg  
DeviceNm_28674_Anlg  
DeviceNm_28675_Anlg  
DeviceNm_28676_Anlg  
DeviceNm_28677_Anlg  
DeviceNm_Display_Screen  
DeviceNm_ResetButton  
DeviceNm_Tab  
PT Primary  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
PT Secondary  
Ct Primary  
Ct Secondary  
I4 CT Primary  
I4 CT Secondary  
Display Screen for Lrg Faceplate  
Reset Command Code  
Tag to indicate tab on tabular  
DeviceNm_Result  
I/O Integer  
Comment  
DeviceNm_23420  
Universal Clock  
PT_SECONDARY  
PT_PRIMARY  
PT Primary  
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
DeviceNm_28673  
DeviceNm_28672  
DeviceNm_28672_GWY  
DeviceNm_28673_GWY  
DeviceNm_28674  
PT Secondary  
CT_Primary  
DeviceNm_28674_GWY  
DeviceNm_28675  
Ct Primary  
CT_Secondary  
Ct Secondary  
DeviceNm_28675_GWY  
DeviceNm_28676  
I4_CT_Primary  
I4 CT Primary  
I4_CT_Secondary  
I4 CT Secondary  
GE77GTWY Comm Check  
DeviceNm_28676_GWY  
DeviceNm_28677  
DeviceNm_28677_GWY  
DeviceNm_DEVICE_STATUS  
Memory Real  
Comment  
DeviceNm_23260_Anlg  
DeviceNm_23261_Anlg  
DeviceNm_23262_Anlg  
DeviceNm_23263_Anlg  
DeviceNm_23264_Anlg  
DeviceNm_24023_Anlg  
DeviceNm_28852_Anlg  
External Numeric 1 - Over Kw Nominal  
External Numeric 2 - Over Ia Nominal  
External Numeric 3 - Over Ib Nominal  
External Numeric 4 - Over Ic Nominal  
External Numeric 5 - Over Vunbal Nominal  
Transient Nominal  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
KW SWD Sub Interval  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Real  
Comment  
DeviceNm_28853_Anlg  
DeviceNm_28854_Anlg  
DeviceNm_28855_Anlg  
DeviceNm_28868_Anlg  
DeviceNm_28869_Anlg  
DeviceNm_28870_Anlg  
DeviceNm_28871_Anlg  
DeviceNm_28884_Anlg  
DeviceNm_28885_Anlg  
DeviceNm_28886_Anlg  
DeviceNm_28887_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29204_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29206_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29208_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29210_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29508_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29686_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29687_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29688_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29689_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29690_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29696_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29697_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29698_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29699_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29700_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29706_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29707_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29708_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29709_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29710_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29716_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29717_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29718_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29719_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29720_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29726_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29727_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29728_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29729_Anlg  
KVAR SWD SUB INTERVAL  
KVA SWD SUBINTERVAL  
IAVG SWD SUB INTERVAL  
KW SWD #SUB INTERVALS  
KVAR SWD #SUB INTERVALS  
KVA SWD #SUB INTERVALS  
IAVG SWD #SUB INTERVALS  
KW SWD PREDICTED RESPONSE  
KVAR SWD PREDICTED RESPONSE  
KVA SWD PREDICTED RESPONSE  
IAVG SWD PREDICTED RESPONSE  
Swell Limit  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Sag Limit  
Change Criteria  
SAG SWELL NOMINAL  
Transient Threshold  
Over KW Over Pickup  
Over Ia Over Pickup  
Over Ib Over Pickup  
Over Ic Over Pickup  
Over Vunbal Over Pickup  
Over KW Over Dropout  
Over Ia Over Dropout  
Over Ib Over Dropout  
Over Ic Over Dropout  
Over Vunbal Over Dropout  
Over KW Under Pickup  
Over Ia Under Pickup  
Over Ib Under Pickup  
Over Ic Under Pickup  
Over Vunbal Under Pickup  
Over KW Under Dropout  
Over Ia Under Dropout  
Over Ib Under Pickup  
Over Ic Under Dropout  
Over Vunbal Under Dropout  
Over KW Time On  
Over Ia Time On  
Over Ib Time On  
Over Ic Time On  
282  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Real  
Comment  
DeviceNm_29730_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29736_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29737_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29738_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29739_Anlg  
DeviceNm_29740_Anlg  
DeviceNm_UniversalClock  
Over Vunbal Time On  
Over KW Time Off  
Over Ia Time Off  
Over Ib Time Off  
Over Ic Time Off  
Over Vunbal Time Off  
Universal Clock Time  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
I/O Real  
Comment  
VLN_A  
DeviceNm_22528  
DeviceNm_22529  
DeviceNm_22530  
DeviceNm_22531  
DeviceNm_22532  
DeviceNm_22533  
DeviceNm_22534  
DeviceNm_22535  
DeviceNm_22536  
DeviceNm_22537  
DeviceNm_22538  
DeviceNm_22539  
DeviceNm_22540  
DeviceNm_22541  
DeviceNm_22542  
DeviceNm_22543  
DeviceNm_22544  
DeviceNm_22545  
DeviceNm_22546  
DeviceNm_22547  
DeviceNm_22548  
DeviceNm_22549  
DeviceNm_22550  
DeviceNm_22551  
DeviceNm_22552  
DeviceNm_22553  
DeviceNm_22554  
DeviceNm_22555  
DeviceNm_22556  
DeviceNm_22557  
DeviceNm_22558  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
VLN_B  
VLN_C  
VLN_AVG  
VLL_AB  
VLL_BC  
VLL_CA  
VLL_AVG  
I_A  
I_B  
I_C  
I_AVG  
KWA  
KWB  
KWC  
KWTOTAL  
KVARA  
KVARB  
KVARC  
KVARTOTAL  
KVAA  
KVAB  
KVAC  
KVATOTAL  
PFSIGNED_A  
PFSIGNED_B  
PFSIGNED_C  
PFSIGNED_TOTAL  
PFLEAD_A  
PFLEAD_B  
PFLEAD_C  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I/O Real  
Comment  
PFLEAD_TOTAL  
PFLAG_A  
DeviceNm_22559  
DeviceNm_22560  
DeviceNm_22561  
DeviceNm_22562  
DeviceNm_22563  
DeviceNm_22564  
DeviceNm_22565  
DeviceNm_22566  
DeviceNm_22567  
DeviceNm_22656  
DeviceNm_22657  
DeviceNm_22658  
DeviceNm_22659  
DeviceNm_22672  
DeviceNm_22673  
DeviceNm_22674  
DeviceNm_22675  
DeviceNm_22688  
DeviceNm_22689  
DeviceNm_22690  
DeviceNm_22691  
DeviceNm_22720  
DeviceNm_22721  
DeviceNm_22722  
DeviceNm_22723  
DeviceNm_22724  
DeviceNm_22725  
DeviceNm_22726  
DeviceNm_22727  
DeviceNm_22728  
DeviceNm_22729  
DeviceNm_22730  
DeviceNm_22731  
DeviceNm_22732  
DeviceNm_22733  
DeviceNm_22734  
DeviceNm_22735  
DeviceNm_22736  
DeviceNm_22737  
DeviceNm_22738  
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
PFLAG_B  
PFLAG_C  
PFLAG_TOTAL  
V_UNBAL  
I_UNBAL  
I_4  
LINE_FREQUENCY  
KW_SWD  
KVAR_SWD  
KVA_SWD  
IAVG_SWD  
KW_PD  
KVAR_PD  
KVA_PD  
IAVG_PD  
KW_TD  
KVAR_TD  
KVA_TD  
IAVG_TD  
VLN_A_MIN  
VLN_B_MIN  
VLN_C_MIN  
VLNAV_MIN  
VLL_AB_MIN  
VLL_BC_MIN  
VLL_CA_MIN  
VLLAVE_MIN  
V_UNBAL_MIN  
IA_MIN  
IB_MIN  
IC_MIN  
IAVE_MIN  
KWTOTAL_MIN  
KVARTOTAL_MIN  
KVATOTAL_MIN  
KW_SWD_MIN  
KVAR_SWD_MIN  
KVA_SWD_MIN  
284  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I/O Real  
Comment  
DeviceNm_22739  
DeviceNm_22740  
DeviceNm_22741  
DeviceNm_22742  
DeviceNm_22743  
DeviceNm_22744  
DeviceNm_22745  
DeviceNm_22746  
DeviceNm_22747  
DeviceNm_22748  
DeviceNm_22749  
DeviceNm_22750  
DeviceNm_22751  
DeviceNm_22752  
DeviceNm_22753  
DeviceNm_22754  
DeviceNm_22755  
DeviceNm_22756  
DeviceNm_22757  
DeviceNm_22758  
DeviceNm_22759  
DeviceNm_22760  
DeviceNm_22761  
DeviceNm_22762  
DeviceNm_22763  
DeviceNm_22764  
DeviceNm_22765  
DeviceNm_22766  
DeviceNm_22767  
DeviceNm_22768  
DeviceNm_22769  
DeviceNm_22770  
DeviceNm_22771  
DeviceNm_22772  
DeviceNm_22773  
DeviceNm_22774  
DeviceNm_22775  
DeviceNm_22776  
DeviceNm_22777  
DeviceNm_22778  
KW_TD_MIN  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
FREQ_MIN  
PF_LEAD_MIN  
PFLAG_TOTAL_MIN  
V1_THD_MIN  
V2_THD_MIN  
V3_THD_MIN  
IA_THD_MIN  
IB_THD_MIN  
IC_THD_MIN  
I4_MIN  
IA_KFACTOR_MIN  
IB_KFACTOR_MIN  
VLN_A_MAX  
VLN_B_MAX  
VLN_C_MAX  
VLNAV_MAX  
VLL_AB_MAX  
VLL_BC_MAX  
VLL_CA_MAX  
VLLAVE_MAX  
V_UNBAL_MAX  
IA_MAX  
IB_MAX  
IC_MAX  
IAVE_MAX  
KWTOTAL_MAX  
KVARTOTAL_MAX  
KVATOTAL_MAX  
KWTOT_SWD_MAX  
KVARTOT_SWD_MAX  
KVATOT_SWD_MAX  
KWTOT_TD_MAX  
FREQ_MAX  
PF_LEAD_MAX  
PFLAG_TOTAL_MAX  
V1_THD_MAX  
V2_THD_MAX  
V3_THD_MAX  
IA_THD_MAX  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I/O Real  
Comment  
DeviceNm_22779  
DeviceNm_22780  
DeviceNm_22781  
DeviceNm_22782  
DeviceNm_22783  
DeviceNm_22847  
DeviceNm_22913  
DeviceNm_22979  
DeviceNm_23045  
DeviceNm_23048  
DeviceNm_23112  
DeviceNm_23115  
DeviceNm_23179  
DeviceNm_23182  
DeviceNm_23246  
DeviceNm_23249  
DeviceNm_23250  
DeviceNm_23251  
DeviceNm_23252  
DeviceNm_23253  
DeviceNm_23254  
DeviceNm_23255  
DeviceNm_23256  
DeviceNm_23257  
DeviceNm_23258  
DeviceNm_23259  
DeviceNm_23260  
DeviceNm_23260_GWY  
DeviceNm_23261  
DeviceNm_23261_GWY  
DeviceNm_23262  
DeviceNm_23262_GWY  
DeviceNm_23263  
DeviceNm_23263_GWY  
DeviceNm_23264  
DeviceNm_23264_GWY  
DeviceNm_23281  
DeviceNm_23282  
DeviceNm_23283  
DeviceNm_23284  
IB_THD_MAX  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
IC_THD_MAX  
KVAR_TD_MAX  
KVA_TD_MAX  
I4_MAX  
V1_THD  
V2_THD  
V3_THD  
I1_TOTAL_HD  
I1_KFACTOR  
I2_TOTAL_HD  
I2_KFACTOR  
I3_TOTAL_HD  
I3_KFACTOR  
I4_TOTAL_HD  
I4_KFACTOR  
STATUS1_CNT  
STATUS2_CNT  
STATUS3_CNT  
STATUS4_CNT  
STATUS5_CNT  
STATUS6_CNT  
STATUS7_CNT  
STATUS8_CNT  
SAGSWELL_COUNT  
TRANSIENT_COUNT  
Over SWD KW Nominal  
External Numeric 1 - Over Kw Nominal  
Over Ia Nominal  
External Numeric 2 - Over Ia Nominal  
Over Ib Nominal  
External Numeric 3 - Over Ib Nominal  
Over Ic Nominal  
External Numeric 4 - Over Ic Nominal  
Over Vunbal Nominal  
External Numeric 5 - Over Vunbal Nominal  
VZERO_SEQ_MAG  
VZERO_SEQ_PHS  
VPOS_SEQ_MAG  
VPOS_SEQ_PHS  
286  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I/O Real  
Comment  
DeviceNm_23285  
DeviceNm_23286  
DeviceNm_23287  
DeviceNm_23288  
DeviceNm_23289  
DeviceNm_23290  
DeviceNm_23291  
DeviceNm_23292  
DeviceNm_24023  
DeviceNm_24023_GWY  
DeviceNm_24074  
DeviceNm_24075  
DeviceNm_24076  
DeviceNm_24077  
DeviceNm_24078  
DeviceNm_24102  
DeviceNm_24103  
DeviceNm_24104  
DeviceNm_24105  
DeviceNm_24106  
DeviceNm_25063  
DeviceNm_25073  
DeviceNm_28678  
DeviceNm_28679  
DeviceNm_28680  
DeviceNm_28681  
DeviceNm_28696  
DeviceNm_28697  
DeviceNm_28698  
DeviceNm_28699  
DeviceNm_28852  
DeviceNm_28852_GWY  
DeviceNm_28853  
DeviceNm_28853_GWY  
DeviceNm_28854  
DeviceNm_28854_GWY  
DeviceNm_28855  
DeviceNm_28855_GWY  
DeviceNm_28868  
DeviceNm_28868_GWY  
VNEG_SEQ_MAG  
VNEG_SEQ_PHS  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
IZERO_SEQ_MAG  
IZERO_SEQ_PHS  
IPOS_SEQ_MAG  
IPOS_SEQ_PHS  
INEG_SEQ_MAG  
INEG_SEQ_PHS  
TRANSIENT_NOM  
TRANSIENT_NOM  
IC_KFACTOR_MIN  
I4_KFACTOR_MIN  
I4_THD_MIN  
KVAR_TD_MIN  
KVA_TD_MIN  
IA_KFACTOR_MAX  
IB_KFACTOR_MAX  
IC_KFACTOR_MAX  
I4_KFACTOR_MAX  
I4_THD_Max  
OVER_KW_OVER  
OVER_KW_UNDER  
Analog1_ZeroScale  
Analog2_ZeroScale  
Analog3_ZeroScale  
Analog4_ZeroScale  
Analog1_FullScale  
Analog2_FullScale  
Analog3_FullScale  
Analog4_FullScale  
KW SWD Sub Interval  
KW SWD Sub Interval  
KVAR SWD SUB INTERVAL  
KVAR SWD SUB INTERVAL  
KVA SWD SUBINTERVAL  
KVA SWD SUBINTERVAL  
IAVG SWD SUB INTERVAL  
IAVG SWD SUB INTERVAL  
KW SWD #SUB INTERVALS  
KW SWD #SUB INTERVALS  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I/O Real  
Comment  
DeviceNm_28869  
KVAR SWD #SUB INTERVALS  
KVAR SWD #SUB INTERVALS  
KVA SWD #SUB INTERVALS  
KVA SWD #SUB INTERVALS  
IAVG SWD #SUB INTERVALS  
IAVG SWD #SUB INTERVALS  
KW SWD PREDICTED RESPONSE  
KW SWD PREDICTED RESPONSE  
KVAR SWD PREDICTED RESPONSE  
KVAR SWD PREDICTED RESPONSE  
KVA SWD PREDICTED RESPONSE  
KVA SWD PREDICTED RESPONSE  
IAVG SWD PREDICTED RESPONSE  
IAVG SWD PREDICTED RESPONSE  
SAGSWELL_LIMIT_MAX  
Swell Limit  
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
DeviceNm_28869_GWY  
DeviceNm_28870  
DeviceNm_28870_GWY  
DeviceNm_28871  
DeviceNm_28871_GWY  
DeviceNm_28884  
DeviceNm_28884_GWY  
DeviceNm_28885  
DeviceNm_28885_GWY  
DeviceNm_28886  
DeviceNm_28886_GWY  
DeviceNm_28887  
DeviceNm_28887_GWY  
DeviceNm_29204  
DeviceNm_29204_GWY  
DeviceNm_29206  
Sag Limit  
DeviceNm_29206_GWY  
DeviceNm_29208  
Sag Limit  
Change Criteria  
DeviceNm_29208_GWY  
DeviceNm_29210  
Change Criteria  
SAG SWELL NOMINAL  
SAG SWELL NOMINAL  
Transient Threshold  
DeviceNm_29210_GWY  
DeviceNm_29508  
DeviceNm_29508_GWY  
DeviceNm_29686  
Transient Threshold  
OVER_KW_PUOVER  
DeviceNm_29686_GWY  
DeviceNm_29687  
Over KW Over Pickup  
OVER_IA_PUOVER  
DeviceNm_29687_GWY  
DeviceNm_29688  
Over Ia Over Pickup  
OVER_IB_PUOVER  
DeviceNm_29688_GWY  
DeviceNm_29689  
Over Ib Over Pickup  
OVER_IC_PUOVER  
DeviceNm_29689_GWY  
DeviceNm_29690  
Over Ic Over Pickup  
OVER_VUN_PUOVER  
Over Vunbal Over Pickup  
OVER_KW_DOOVER  
Over KW Over Dropout  
OVER_IA_DOOVER  
DeviceNm_29690_GWY  
DeviceNm_29696  
DeviceNm_29696_GWY  
DeviceNm_29697  
DeviceNm_29697_GWY  
DeviceNm_29698  
Over Ia Over Dropout  
OVER_IB_DOOVER  
DeviceNm_29698_GWY  
Over Ib Over Dropout  
288  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I/O Real  
Comment  
DeviceNm_29699  
OVER_IC_DOOVER  
Over Ic Over Dropout  
OVER_VUN_DOOVER  
Over Vunbal Over Dropout  
OVER_KW_PUUNDER  
Over KW Under Pickup  
OVER_IA_PUUNDER  
Over Ia Under Pickup  
OVER_IB_PUUNDER  
Over Ib Under Pickup  
OVER_IC_PUUNDER  
Over Ic Under Pickup  
OVER_VUN_PUUNDER  
Over Vunbal Under Pickup  
OVER_KW_DOUNDER  
Over KW Under Dropout  
OVER_IA_DOUNDER  
Over Ia Under Dropout  
OVER_IB_DOUnder  
Over Ib Under Pickup  
OVER_IC_DOUNDER  
Over Ic Under Dropout  
OVER_VUN_DOUNDER  
Over Vunbal Under Dropout  
OVER_KW_ON  
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
DeviceNm_29699_GWY  
DeviceNm_29700  
DeviceNm_29700_GWY  
DeviceNm_29706  
DeviceNm_29706_GWY  
DeviceNm_29707  
DeviceNm_29707_GWY  
DeviceNm_29708  
DeviceNm_29708_GWY  
DeviceNm_29709  
DeviceNm_29709_GWY  
DeviceNm_29710  
DeviceNm_29710_GWY  
DeviceNm_29716  
DeviceNm_29716_GWY  
DeviceNm_29717  
DeviceNm_29717_GWY  
DeviceNm_29718  
DeviceNm_29718_GWY  
DeviceNm_29719  
DeviceNm_29719_GWY  
DeviceNm_29720  
DeviceNm_29720_GWY  
DeviceNm_29726  
DeviceNm_29726_GWY  
DeviceNm_29727  
Over KW Time On  
OVER_IA_ON  
DeviceNm_29727_GWY  
DeviceNm_29728  
Over Ia Time On  
OVER_IB_ON  
DeviceNm_29728_GWY  
DeviceNm_29729  
Over Ib Time On  
OVER_IC_ON  
DeviceNm_29729_GWY  
DeviceNm_29730  
Over Ic Time On  
OVER_VUN_ON  
DeviceNm_29730_GWY  
DeviceNm_29736  
Over Vunbal Time On  
OVER_KW_OFF  
DeviceNm_29736_GWY  
DeviceNm_29737  
Over KW Time Off  
OVER_IA_OFF  
DeviceNm_29737_GWY  
DeviceNm_29738  
Over Ia Time Off  
OVER_IB_OFF  
DeviceNm_29738_GWY  
Over Ib Time Off  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I/O Real  
Comment  
DeviceNm_29739  
DeviceNm_29739_GWY  
DeviceNm_29740  
DeviceNm_29740_GWY  
OVER_IC_OFF  
Over Ic Time Off  
OVER_VUN_OFF  
Over Vunbal Time Off  
Y
N
Y
N
Memory Message  
Comment  
Voltage Mode Message  
Ia Polarity  
DeviceNm_30720_Msg  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DeviceNm_30721_Msg  
DeviceNm_30722_Msg  
Ib Polarity  
DeviceNm_30723_Msg  
Ic Polarity  
DeviceNm_30724_Msg  
Phase Order  
DeviceNm_31032_Msg  
Waveform Recorder Format  
I4 Polarity  
DeviceNm_31305_Msg  
DeviceNm_31306_Msg  
Va Polarity  
DeviceNm_31307_Msg  
Vb Polarity  
DeviceNm_31308_Msg  
Vc Polarity  
DeviceNm_Status_Input1_Name  
DeviceNm_Status_Input2_Name  
DeviceNm_Status_Input3_Name  
DeviceNm_Status_Input4_Name  
DeviceNm_Status_Input5_Name  
DeviceNm_Status_Input6_Name  
DeviceNm_Status_Input7_Name  
DeviceNm_Status_Input8_Name  
DeviceNm_Analog1_Name  
DeviceNm_Analog2_Name  
DeviceNm_Analog3_Name  
DeviceNm_Analog4_Name  
DeviceNm_DownloadMessage  
DeviceNm_ResetMessage  
DEVICENM_ErrorMessage  
DeviceNm_RefreshMessage  
DeviceNm_Path  
Download Message  
Reset Message  
Error Message  
Refresh Message  
I/O Message  
DeviceNm_4864  
DeviceNm_4867  
DeviceNm_4868  
DeviceNm_4936  
Comment  
Device_Type  
N
N
N
Y
Hardware_Rev  
SERIAL_NUMBER  
Ethernet_IP_Address  
290  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I/O Message  
Comment  
DeviceNm_4937  
Ethernet_Subnet  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
DeviceNm_4938  
Ethernet_DGateway  
Analog1 Value  
DeviceNm_22608  
DeviceNm_22609  
DeviceNm_22610  
DeviceNm_22611  
DeviceNm_22704  
DeviceNm_22705  
DeviceNm_22706  
DeviceNm_22707  
DeviceNm_22708  
DeviceNm_22709  
DeviceNm_22710  
DeviceNm_22711  
DeviceNm_22712  
DeviceNm_29161  
DeviceNm_29236  
DeviceNm_29237  
DeviceNm_30720  
DeviceNm_30720_GWY  
DeviceNm_30721  
DeviceNm_30721_GWY  
DeviceNm_30722  
DeviceNm_30722_GWY  
DeviceNm_30723  
DeviceNm_30723_GWY  
DeviceNm_30724  
DeviceNm_30724_GWY  
DeviceNm_31032  
DeviceNm_31032_GWY  
DeviceNm_31110  
DeviceNm_31111  
DeviceNm_31305  
DeviceNm_31305_GWY  
DeviceNm_31306  
DeviceNm_31306_GWY  
DeviceNm_31307  
DeviceNm_31307_GWY  
DeviceNm_31308  
DeviceNm_31308_GWY  
Analog2_Value  
Analog3_Value  
Analog 4_Value  
KWH_IMPRT  
KWH_EXPRT  
KWH_TOT  
KWH_NT  
KVARH_IMPRT  
KVARH_EXPRT  
KVARH_TOT  
KVARH_NT  
KVAH_TOT  
Comm1_UID  
Comm2_UID  
Comm3_UID  
VOLT_INPUT_MODE_MSG  
VOLT_INPUT_MODE_MSG  
IA_POLARITY_INPUT_MS  
IA_POLARITY_INPUT_MS  
IB_POLARITY_INPUT_MS  
IB_POLARITY_INPUT_MS  
IC_POLARITY_INPUT_MS  
IC_POLARITY_INPUT_MS  
PHASE_ORDER_INPUR_MS  
PHASE_ORDER_INPUR_MS  
Waveform Recorder Format  
Waveform Recorder Format  
Comm1_Mode  
Comm1_Baud  
I4_Polarity_Input_Ms  
I4_Polarity_Input_Ms  
Va_POLARITY_INPUT_MS  
Va_POLARITY_INPUT_MS  
VB_POLARITY_INPUT_MS  
VB_POLARITY_INPUT_MS  
VC_POLARITY_INPUT_MS  
VC_POLARITY_INPUT_MS  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I/O Message  
Comment  
DeviceNm_31309  
DeviceNm_31310  
DeviceNm_31311  
DeviceNm_31312  
DeviceNm_31313  
DeviceNm_31314  
Comm2_Baud  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Comm3_Baud  
Comm1_Protocol  
Comm2_Protocol  
Comm3_Protocol  
Ethernet_Protocol  
292  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
event, 96, 99  
2
F
239 Motor Protection Relay, 171  
269 Plus Motor Management Relay, 87, 88, 175  
Fanuc, 216, 217  
Floor Plan wizards, 5, 23  
Floor Plans, 55, 57  
3
369 Motor Management Relay, 176  
I
Interface Toolkit, 1, 3, 5  
5
565 Feeder Management Relay, 92, 198  
L
Large Faceplate Wizards, 8  
Lockout/Tagout wizard, 42  
7
735 Feeder Relay, 200  
M
9
MDP Digital Overcurrent Relay, 107  
Micro 90, 217  
90/30, 216  
90/70, 216  
MMII (Motor Manager II), 119  
P
A
PMCS Interface Toolkit, 1  
alarm, 88, 95  
POWER LEADER EPM, 68, 101  
POWER LEADER Meter, 76, 105  
Annunciator Panel wizard, 25  
C
S
Custom Table wizard, 35  
Sample Application, 61  
Small Faceplate Wizards, 6  
Spectra ECM, 78, 106  
E
Spectra MVT trip unit, 71, 102  
SR469 Motor Management Relay, 184  
SR489 Generator Management Relay, 192  
SR745 Transformer Management Relay, 203  
SR750 Feeder Management Relay, 209  
System Statistics wizard, 40  
Elevation views, 1, 6, 22, 23, 55, 56  
Elevation Views, 55  
Elevation wizards, 5, 22, 55  
EPM 3710 Meter, 80, 120  
EPM 3720 Meter, 82, 121  
EPM 7300 Meter, 84, 122, 126  
EPM 7500 Meter, 130  
EPM 7700 Meter, 140  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UR, 150  
T
Tabular Data Screen Wizards, 11, 99  
Toolbar wizard, 24  
W
waveform capture, 99  
U
Universal Relay, 150  
Universal Relay Devices, 150  
294 Index  
PMCS Interface Toolkit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(This page left blank intentionally.)  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GE Industrial Systems  
General Electric Company  
41 Woodford Ave., Plainville, CT 06062  
GEH-6513 R011 0102  
© 2000 - 2002 General Electric Company  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Clover Electronics Digital Camera CC5301 User Manual
Cooper Lighting Landscape Lighting N175MV User Manual
Danby Refrigerator DCR122BLDD User Manual
Desa Tech Gas Heater GCH480 User Manual
Dixon Lawn Mower 1857 0599 User Manual
Edimax Technology Network Card HP 8501 User Manual
Electro Voice Speaker EVH 1152S 43 User Manual
Fisher Price Mobility Aid H6372 User Manual
Generac Power Systems Portable Generator 004916 0 User Manual
Genesis Advanced Technologies Speaker Servo Subwoofer User Manual